Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Series

Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language

Editor : Medh Michika, AVG, Anaikatti

Published by:

Arsha Avinash Foundation

104 Third Street, Tatabad, Coimbatore 641012, India
Phone: + 91 9487373635
E mail: arshaavinash@gmail.com
www.arshaavinash.in
 Volume 1
Basic Structure
Struct re of the Language

Medh Michika
AVG Anaikkatti, 2016
2016
Copyright 2016 by Medh Michika
All rights reserved.

The contents of this work may not in any shape or form be reproduced
without permission from Medh Michika.

All profit from the sales of this book goes towards the activities initiated by
r Pjya Svam Daynanda Sarasvat.

Electronic version of this book is available at:

Arsha Avinash Foundation
www.arshaavinash.in

Printed version of this book is available at:

Arsha Vidya Gurukulam, Coimbatore, TN, India
www.arshavidya.in
Swami Dayananda Ashram, Rishikesh, UK, India
www.dayananda.org
Arsha Vidya Gurukulam, Saylorsburg, PA, USA
www.arshavidya.org
CreateSpace
www.createspace.com (Search by medha michika)
Amazon of your country
www.amazon.com etc. (Search by medha michika)

Tutorial videos to accompany this series of books will soon be available

online. Search YouTube under "Medha Sanskrit".
 Books on Sanskrit Grammar

By Medh Michika

1. The Script

Devangar (Sanskrit alphabet) Volume 1 Single letters

Study Book Volume 2 Conjunct consonants & Exercises on mantras
and lokas
2. Basic Sanskrit Grammar
(Sufficient to allow the student to read lokas and commentaries on rmad Bhagavad Gt)
Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language

Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language - Workbook

Volume 2 Phonetics & Sandhi

Volume 3 Derivatives (Pacav6ttaya7)

3. Reference Books

Dhtukoa7 (A Dictionary of Verbal Roots)

A:;dhyy-strap;ha7 (List of P=ini-Stra)

4. Grammatical Analysis

Rmodantam (A story of r Rma)

Grammatical Analysis of Volume 1 Tvampada-vicra7 (Chapter 1 6)

rmad Bhagavad Gt Volume 2 Tatpada-vicra7 (Chapter 7 12)

Volume 3 Aikya-vicra7 (Chapter 13 18)

5. Advanced Study in P=ini-Stra

Study Guide to P=ini-Stra Volume 1 - 10

through Laghusiddhntakaumud

i
 Grammatical Analysis Steps, and the Corresponding Books

The primary objective of studying Sanskrit Grammar is to understand the basic unit of
the language, the sentence. The basic steps required to do this, and the relevant books in this
series, are;

Step 1:
Remove sandhi (phonetic change) between words of the sentence.
Relevant books Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 2 Phonetics & Sandhi
Optionally accompanied by A:;dhyy-strap;ha7 (List of P=ini-Stra)
Step 2:
Identify the verb, and ascertain the verbal root, suffix, and meaning.
Relevant books Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language
For meaning of root, or root with prefix Dhtukoa7 (A Dictionary of Verbal Roots)
For derived roots Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 3 Derivatives (Pacav6ttaya7)
Step 3:
Determine the relationship of each noun to the verb.
Ascertain the nominal bases and suffixes, and the corresponding meanings.
Relevant books Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 1 Basic Structure of the Language
For derived nominal bases Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar Volume 3 Derivatives
(Pacav6ttaya7)

These steps are demonstrated in the Grammatical Analysis series.

Once the student has become comfortable with reading Sanskrit sentences, one may
wish to commence the study of P=ini-Stra. This sets the mind in alignment with the minds
of the 6i:is for deeper understanding of the scriptures.
Relevant books
- A:;dhyy-strap;ha7 (List of P=ini-Stra)
- Study Guide to P=ini-Stra through Laghusiddhnta-kaumud- Volume 1 - 10

ii
 Preface

M
LNOP QR S [rgurubhyo nama7] (Salutations to my teachers)

This book is the revision of the book Sanskrit Grammar for Vedanta Students.
I changed the title to Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar because the more I teach the more I find
that the impediment in learning Sanskrit is not intellectual, but psychological. As repeatedly
emphasized by my respected guru, r Pjya Svam Daynanda Sarasvat, it is important to be relaxed
and make the study enjoyable.
In this book the presentation of the topics is based purely on the tradition, but at the same
time I have tried to make it easily understandable by the student in the modern scheme.
Throughout this series of grammar books, the knowledge of Sanskrit grammar is presented
for understanding, rather than just memorizing. Only when the grammar and P=inis system to
explain the grammar are understood, can one fully enjoy the language and the knowledge given
through it.
This series of books is therefore useful not only for students of scriptures in Sanskrit, but also
for those who just want to gain an overview of the linguistics aspect of the Sanskrit language.
My prayers to all the students of all the scriptures of this great culture of India.
RZ[\ Michika
September 2016, AVG Anaikkatti

Preface to Sanskrit Grammar for Vedanta Students

M
LNOP QR S (Salutations to my teachers)

I began my study of Sanskrit in Rishikesh in 2007 while I was staying at the Swami
Dayananda Ashram. As a student in a 3 year course in Vedanta and Sanskrit from 2010 to 2013 at
Arsha Vidya Gurukulam, Anaikkatti, Tamil Nadu, India, I often tutored my classmates in reading
`
^\_R and understanding the usage of Sanskrit language by aZb\c\d\efs (traditional teachers of
Vedanta). I learned from this experience what works and what does not work in the presentation of
Sanskrit grammar. Since existing Sanskrit textbooks are not well suited to the particular needs of
Vedanta students, I decided to write this book.

gh[i\j (Who is this book for)

This book is intended primarily for those whose purpose in studying Sanskrit is to understand
the usage of Sanskrit employed by traditional teachers in unfolding the vision of Vedanta. The

iii
approach taken in this series of textbooks is based on a clear conceptual understanding of Sanskrit
grammar that can be directly applied to Vedanta teaching and its texts. Thus, it should be useful for
beginners as well as more experienced students, and can serve as a resource for teachers in need of
systematic, clear, and thorough materials.

hake (The subject matter of this textbook)

This series of textbooks is an introduction to classical Sanskrit grammar, the main sourcebook
of which is the work of Sage P=ini.
The first volume covers mainly syntax, giving students the tools needed to analyze basic
`
Sanskrit sentences, including the fundamentals of hlmcR (verbs) M
and nocR `
(nouns), and the
`
formation and function of each word in a sentence as it relates to a verb in terms of its i\jiR (factor of
action) and ha^hp (case ending). Students should be able to start reading relatively simple Vedanta
scriptures within a few months.
`
The subsequent volumes will cover qraste (five types of derivatives, i.e., is l-lhul-nR\n-viwZ
k-
nQ\xc[\la ) so that the student can grasp these grammatically derived words and hayz\ (explanatory
sentences) heavily used by aZb\c\d\efs in both oral and written teachings, including ^\_R. ` Another
volume will provide a thorough introduction to P=ini stra, which develops clarity in thinking and
facilitates communication with traditional teachers of Vedanta.
This series of textbooks offers the following useful features, which are not found in other
materials:
1) Organization by grammatical topics gives the student a good grasp on the overall structure of
the language, and enables the books to be used for reference.
`
2) Differentiation of the concepts of i\jiR and ha^hp These fundamental concepts are essentially
distinct, yet have not been clearly presented in other textbooks. To establish conceptual clarity, I
introduced the various relationships that are embodied in the i\jis first in English before dealing
with the mechanics of noun formation and declension in Sanskrit.
3) Clear terminology I have seen that loose usage of grammatical terms at the beginning will
create problems later. Terminology and explanations in this textbook are consistent with those in
P=ini-stras.
4) Vocabulary selected especially for students of Vedanta The vocabulary words taught in this
book are selected from vocabulary often encountered in the teaching of Vedanta. This will
facilitate students rapid access to original Vedanta texts, and eliminate the unnecessary exercise
of memorizing lists of words unlikely to ever be actually needed.
5) Early introduction of pronouns The declensions of gi\j\c-nafQ\R (a-ending pronouns) as well as
`
lb, eb, vlb, and hiR are very similar to the declension of j\R. Since these related words are heavily
used in the language, I introduce them together with j\R-w{ near the beginning of the lessons.
This has never been done in other textbooks. The usage of relative pronouns is thoroughly
introduced with explanation and exercises for practise.
6) Clear, progressive exercises give students the practise they need to learn and develop their
skills, and give teachers a way to track students progress.

iv
7) Visually clear presentation - The organization of materials makes the information accessible to
those who have gone through modern education systems.

`
|eP}QR (The expected result of this textbook)
In the course of completing volume 1, along with the Sandhi Handbook, the following results
can be expected:
1) A clear and systematic method of parsing sentences will be acquired and practised.
2) Students will be able to start analysing simple verses and prose within a few months.
3) From the beginning of the study, students understanding and appreciation of Vedanta classes
will be enhanced because technical terms are introduced from the beginning.
4) Later, transition to the study of grammar as it is presented by P=ini-stras will be seamless.

n (The relationship between the study of this book and expected results)
Students and teachers can simply follow the study guide provided from page 97 to attain the
expected results.1

Successful study of Sanskrit requires cognitive capacity, consistent effort, and the grace of j.
Personal growth and emotional maturity are necessary in order to have a mind that is available for
the study of Vedanta and Sanskrit. Prayers should be continued to earn that grace.

August 2014, AVG Anaikkatti

RZ[\ Michika

1
Of the edition of Sanskrit Grammar for Vedanta Students.

v
vi
 Table of Contents

Prayers 1
Topic I - Letters/Sounds 3
Topic II - Structure of the Sanskrit Language 5
Building Blocks of the Sanskrit Language 5
Topic III - Factors of action (i\jiR)` 11
`
Basic concepts of i\jiR [krakam] (Factors of action) 11
1. il\f [kart] (Agent of action) 12
2. iRf [karma] (Object of action) 13
`
3. ijR [kara=am] (Instrument of action) 14
`
4. nb\QR [sampradnam] (Recipient of action) 15
`
5. gq\b\QR [apdnam] (Origin of action) 16
`
6. gh[ijR [adhikara=am] (Locus of action) 18
`
Topic IV - The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam]) 19
`
1. What is verb (hlmcR [tiantam])? 19
`
2. Constituents of verb (hlmcR [tiantam]) 19
3. Classifications of [\l M [dhtu] (verbal root) 21
4. Ten i\js [lakra]s 23
5. Verbal suffix (hlm-` |e [ti-pratyaya7]) 26
6. Objectives of learning hlmcR ` 28
7. Summary the formation of hlmcR ` 29
8. Steps in formation of hlmcR ` 30
Topic V - Conjugation in ` (present tense) 31
1. ` in ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice) with qj qb [\l M (Parasmaipad dhtu7) 32
M Pw [dhtukoa7]
2. Consulting [\li 35
3. qnL\f [upasarg7] (Verbal prefixes) 36
4. ` in ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice) with Q Zqb [\l M (tmanepad dhtu7) 37

vii
5. ` in ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice) with common [\lsM 40
6. ` in iRfh |ePL (Passive Voice) 43
7. ^\aZ |ePL (Impersonal Voice) 44
Topic VI - Conjugation in other i\js 45
1. h ` (Perfect Past Tense) 46
2. ` (First Future Tense) 48
3. s ` (Second Future Tense) 50
4. P ` (Imperative Mood) 52
5. m ` (Simple Past Tense) 55
6. hah[hm ` (Potential Mood) 58
7. w hfm ` (Benedictive Mood) 61
8. m ` (General Past Tense) 63
9. sm ` (Conditional Mood) 65
M
Topic VII - The Concept of Nouns (nocR `
[subantam]) 67
M
1. What is noun (nocR `
[subantam])? 67
M
2. Constituents of noun (nocR `
[subantam]) 67
3. Classification of |\hlqhbi [prtipadika] 69
`
4. Nominal suffix (nqM -|e [sup-pratyaya7]) 72
M
5. Objectives of learning nocR ` 73
Topic VIII - Meanings of case endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7]) 74
Basic concepts of ha^hp [vibhakti7] (case ending) 74
1. |R\ ha^hp (First Case) 76
2. hl e\ ha^hp (Second Case) 77
3. lsl e\ ha^hp (Third Case) 78
4. dlM ha^hp (Fourth Case) 79
5. qrR ha^hp (Fifth Case) 80
6. k ha^hp (Sixth Case) 83
7. nR ha^hp (Seventh Case) 84
8. Summary table of ha^\f 86

viii
Topic IX - Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns 87
1. g-ending in qh M (masculine) j\R [rma] 89
2. g-ending Pronouns in qh M (masculine) naf [sarva] 93
3. Other Pronouns in qh M (masculine) lb, eb, vlb, hiR ` 95
M ih (neuter) \Q [j=na]
4. g-ending in Qqn 99
M ih (neuter) naf [sarva]
5. g-ending Pronouns in Qqn 100
M ih (neuter) lb, eb, vlb, hiR `
6. Other Pronouns in Qqn 101
7. /-ending in qh M (masculine) zhj [hari]/LNM [guru] 103
8. -ending in qh M (masculine) ils f [kart6] 106
9. -ending in h (feminine) L\ [gag] 109
10. -ending Pronouns in h (feminine) na\f [sarv] 111
11. Other Pronouns in h (feminine) lb, eb, vlb, hiR ` 112
12. -ending in h (feminine) Qb [nad] 114
13. -ending in h (feminine) Rhl [mati] 116
`
14. Pronoun bR [idam] 118
`
15. Pronoun gbn [adas] 120
16. Pronouns e M b ` [yu:mad], gb ` [asmad] 122
17. Referring to the same object again (g\bZw [anvdea7]) with bR/vlb ` 124
Topic X - Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases 125
Common steps in declension of zc (consonant-ending) |\hlqhbi (nominal base) 125
`
1. -ending in qh M (masculine)/ h (feminine) nL `
M [suga=] 128
`
2. l/b/[/^-ending `
in qh M (masculine)/ h (feminine) RNl [marut] 130
`
3. d/}-ending `
in qh M (masculine)/ h (feminine) d [6c] 133
`
4. Q-ending `
in qh M / h ePhLQ [yogin]/ePhLQ [yogin] 134
`
5. Rl/al-ending `
in qh M / h ^Lal [bhagavat]/^Lal [bhagavat] 136
`
6. wls- ending in qh M / h nl [sat]/nl [sat] 138
`
7. gQ-ending `
in qh M (masculine) Q [tman] 140
`
8. gQ-ending in Qqn `
M ih (neuter) Q [brahman] 142

ix
 `
9. gn-ending in Qqn `
M ih (neuter) RQn [manas] 144
`
10. k/k-ending in Qqn `
M ih (neuter) Phlk [jyoti:]/d `
kM [cak:u:] 146
`
11. gn-ending `
in qh M (masculine) dRn [candramas] 148
`
Topic XI - Nouns in Apposition (nR\Q\h[ijR [samndhikara=am]) 149
`
Topic XII Indeclinables (geR [avyayam]) 152
ges derived from [\l M 155
ges derived from nafQ\Rs 157
Appendix 159
Exercises 161
Worksheets for photocopying 186

x
 Prayers

om

fM R S` |n-abQ \eZl naf

M \j[j ha M whwa dl^M }
w ` haPqw\ceZ
uklmbaradhara vi u aivar a caturbhujam |
prasannavadana dhyyet sarvavighnopantaye ||1||

M ajbZ i\Rhqh S hax\j ihj_\hR hnhu^fal M RZ nb\

njhl QRO
sarasvati namastubhya varade kmarpi i |
vidyrambha kari ymi siddhirbhavatu me sad ||2||

eZQ\jnR\\eRh[L RzZj\l S` is \ij |Pp l q\hQeZ QR

yenk arasammnyamadhigamya mahevart |
k&tsna vykara a prokta tasmai p inaye nama' ||3||

a\i\j ajNhd ^\_i\j qlhR S` q\hhQ ni\j d |lPh RhM QeR

`
vkyakra vararuci bh yakra patajalim |
p ini strakra ca pra ato'smi munitrayam ||4||

a\L\fhaa nsp a\L f|hlqteZ S }Ll hqlj aZ q\afl qjRZj

vgarthviva samp&ktau vgarthapratipattaye |
jagata' pitarau vande prvatparamevarau ||5||

w\hc w\hc w\hc

om nti' nti' nti' ||
1
Meaning of the prayers:

1. For the removal of all obstacles, may one meditate upon Ga=ea, who wears white
garment, who is all pervasive, whose complexion is like moon, who has four arms, and
who has smiling face.

2. Sarasvat! My salutations to you. The one who gives boons! The one who has beautiful
form! I will start my study. May success be with me all the time.

3. My salutations to P=ini, by whom the entire grammar system has been taught after
receiving Mhevarastra from iva.

4. I remain saluting to three sages: Vararuci, the author of Vrtika, Patajali, the author of
Mahbh:ya, and P=ini, the author of P=ini-stra.

5. For proper understanding of the meaning of words, I salute Prvat and Paramevara,
the parents of jagat, who are non-separate like the word and its meaning.

May the obstacles pertaining to my body-mind-sense-complex, to other beings around

me, and to the natural environments, be removed.

Assignment on Prayer:
Write all the lokas (verses) of the prayer in both Devanagar and transliteration (i.e.
using this Romanized script, as on page 1).
Try to memorize all the lokas (verses) of the prayer.

2
 Topic I Letters/Sounds

Topic I
Letters/Sounds

Sanskrit is a sound-based language.

In Sanskrit, unlike English, there is a perfect one-to-one correspondence between
what is written (letter) and what is pronounced (sound). Any script can be used in
Sanskrit as long as this one-to-one correspondence between letter and sound is
maintained. The most commonly used script for Sanskrit is called Devangar.

Chart 1: Letters used in Sanskrit

Class 1st of 2nd of 3rd of 4th of

the the the the 5th / Semi
Sibilants Vowels
nasals vowels
Category class class class class

Gutturals i L m z g/
ka kha ga gha .a ha a/

Palatals d } e w /
ca cha ja jha a ya a i/

Cerebrals j k /
0a 0ha 1a 1ha a ra a &/2

Dentals l b [ Q n
ta tha da dha na la sa 3

Labials q o ^ R a /
pa pha ba bha ma va u/
To facilitate pronunciation, g [a] has been added after each consonant in this chart.

Diphthongs: v e, ai, o, au
Special letters/sounds which come after vowel: (anusvra7), 7 (visarga7)

3
 Topic I Letters/Sounds

Letters/Sounds:
1. Vowels:
There are nine vowels in Sanskrit:
5 simple vowels short form: g, , , ,
(long form: , , , )
4 diphthongs long v, , ,

Note that short vowel is called [hrasva7] and long vowel is called b f [drgha7].
M [gu=a7]. , , and are termed ashu [v6ddhi7].
g, v, and are termed L

2. Consonants:
There are thirty-three consonants in Sanskrit.
25 consonants = 5 categories x 5 classes (from i ` to R)`
4 Semivowels (e, ` j,` , a)`
4 Sibilants (w, ` k, ` n, ` z `)

M
3. gQ\j [anusvra7]
The nasal sound which is represented by a dot above a vowel, or . E.g., gw M [au7]

4. hanLf [visarga7]/han}fQ e [visarjanya7]

The aspirated guttural sound which is represented by : or 7 after a vowel.
E.g., j\R [rma7], j\R\ [rm7], j\R [rmai7], zhj [hari7], zjZ [hare7], LNM [guru7], etc.

Symbols in Devangar script:

zc [halanta7] : A stroke below a consonant, indicating that the consonant stands by
itself without any vowel following it. E.g., i ` [k] l [t]
` etc.

b [da=a7] : A vertical line which indicates the end of a sentence or one section of a
verse. A double line indicates at the end of a verse or paragraph. E.g., j\RP LhlS

Assignment on Letters/Sounds:
Get familiar with Devangar. If needed, use Devangar Studybook volume 1 and 2.
M , ashu , gQ\j
Add these words to your vocabulary: , b f , L M , hanLf .
Explain the classification of the letters.

4
 Topic II Structure of Sanskrit Language

Topic II
Structure of the Sanskrit Language

Building Blocks of the Sanskrit Language

`
A sentence (a\R [vkyam]) is a unit of expression to communicate an idea.
E.g. j\R aQ Lhl S [rma7 vana gacchati] (Rma goes to the forest.)
`
is a sentence (a\R [vkyam]).

`
A a\R consists `
of a word (qbR [padam]) or words (qb\hQ [padni]).2

`
a\R [vkyam] (sentence)

`
qbR [padam] `
qbR [padam] `
qbR [padam]
(word) (word) (word)

qb\hQ [padni] (words)

E.g., in the sentence above, there are three words (qb\hQ [padni]).
`
1. j\R [rma7] (Rma); 2. aQR [vanam] (to the forest); 3. Lhl [gacchati] (goes)

2
`
qbR [padam] is a form in singular, while qb\hQ [padni] is a form in plural.
5
 Topic II Structure of Sanskrit Language

In the Sanskrit language, there are only two types of words:

`
1. Verb (hlmc qbR [tianta padam]; literally word ending with ti-suffix)

E.g. Lhl [gacchati] (goes)

M
2. Noun (noc `
qbR [subanta padam]; literally word ending with sup-suffix)

`
E.g. j\R [rma7] (Rma); aQR [vanam] (to the forest)

Every word in Sanskrit is comprised of two basic constituents:

Original entity (|is hl [prak6ti7]) + Suffix (|e [pratyaya7])

`
qbR [padam] |is hl [prak6ti7] |e [pratyaya7]
= +
(word) (original entity) (suffix)

E.g. word = original entity + suffix 3

j\R = j\R (Rma) + `
n (agent/singular)
aQR ` = aQ (forest) + `
gR (object/singular)
Lhl = ` go)
LR (to + hl (present/active/
3rd person/singular)

This concept is used by Sage P=ini, the grammarian who established a meta-
language to explain the whole Sanskrit grammar.

3
Suffix is a grammatical term for a group of letters which is attached after an original entity.
Suffix modifies the meaning or form of the original entity.
6
 Topic II Structure of Sanskrit Language

`
With that concept, the constituents of a word (qbR [padam]) are explained as follows:

`
1. Verb (hlmc qbR [tianta padam]) :

As for verb, the original entity (|is hl [prak6ti7]) is verbal root ([\l M [dhtu7]),
which indicates action. The suffix (|e [pratyaya7]) is verbal suffix (hlm-` |e [ti-
pratyaya7]), which indicates tense or mood, voice, person, and number.

`
verb (hlmc qbR [tianta padam])
= root ([\l M [dhtu7]) + verbal suffix (hlm-` |e [ti-pratyaya7])

hlmc qbR ` [\l M hlm-` |e

[tianta padam] = [dhtu7] + [ti-pratyaya7]
(verb) (root) (verbal suffix)

E.g.,
` hl
Lhl = LR +
` go) + hl (present/active/3rd person/singular)
Lhl (he goes) = LR (to
`
Lhl (he goes) is a verb (hlmc qbR [tianta padam]).
` go) is verbal root ([\l M [dhtu7]).
LR (to
hl (present/active/3rd person/singular) is verbal suffix (hlm-` |e [ti-pratyaya7]).

7
 Topic II Structure of Sanskrit Language

2. Noun (noc `
M qbR [subanta padam]):

As for noun, the original entity (|is hl [prak6ti7]) is nominal base (|\hlqhbiR `
[prtipadikam]), which indicates a thing or person. The suffix (|e [pratyaya7]) is
`
nominal suffix (nqM -|e [sup-pratyaya7]), which indicates case and number.4

M
noun (noc `
qbR [subanta padam])
`
= nominal base (|\hlqhbiR [prtipadikam]) `
+ nominal suffix (nqM -|e [sup-
pratyaya7])

M
noc qbR ` |\hlqhbiR ` `
nqM -|e
[subanta padam] = [prtipadikam] + [sup-pratyaya7]
(noun) (nominal base) (nominal suffix)

E.g.,
j\R = j\R + n `
M
j\R (Rma) is a noun (noc `
qbR [subanta padam]).
`
j\R (Rma) is nominal base (|\hlqhbiR [prtipadikam])
`
n (agent `
/singular) is nominal suffix (nqM -|e [sup-pratyaya7])
E.g.,
` aQ + gR `
aQR =
` the forest) is a noun (noc
aQR (to M `
qbR [subanta padam]).
`
aQ (forest) is nominal base (|\hlqhbiR [prtipadikam])
`
gR (object/singular) `
is nominal suffix (nqM -|e [sup-pratyaya7])

4
` of nqM [sup]
The q [p] ` ` in the word nocR
becomes o [b] M ` [subantam] because of a sandhi rule,
which is studied in Volume 2 in this series. (Ref. P=ini-stra 8.2.39)
8
 Topic II Structure of Sanskrit Language

`
There are two types of suffix (|e [pratyaya7]) to make a word (qbR [padam]).

1. Verbal suffix (hlm ` |e [ti pratyaya7])

There are eighteen verbal suffixes by three persons and three numbers in two
types.
They are called hlm ` [ti] because they start with hl [ti] and end with m ` [].

Type P Type A

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person `
hlq [tip] `
ln [tas] h [jhi] l [ta] `
l\R [tm] [jha]

2nd person `
hnq [sip] `
n [thas] [tha] `
\n [ths] `
\R [thm] `
R [dhvam]

1st person `
hRq [mip] `
an [vas] `
Rn [mas] ` [i;] ahz [vahi] Rhzm` [mahi]

`
2. Nominal suffix (nqM |e [sup pratyaya7])
There are twenty-one nominal suffixes by seven cases and three numbers.
`
They are called nq M [sup] `
because they start with n M [su] and end with q [p].

Singular Dual Plural

1st case n M [su] [au] `

}n [jas]

2nd case `
gR [am] ` [au;] `
wn [as]

3rd case \ [;] `

O\R [bhym] `
h^n [bhis]

4th case mZ [e] `

O\R [bhym] `
On [bhyas]

5th case mhn [asi] `

O\R [bhym] `
On [bhyas]

6th case `
mn [as] `
n [os] `
R [m]

7th case hm [i] `

n [os] `
nqM [sup]

(The symbol on top of n M and mhn indicates nasal vowel for technical purposes.)

To be used in the language, a word should be technically qualified as qbR. ` Thus

`
every word in Sanskrit language must end with either hlm-` |e or nqM -|e. (By
M
P=ini-stra 1.4.14 nhmc `
qbR S)

9
 Topic II Structure of Sanskrit Language

`
In every sentence there is one verb (hlmc qbR [tianta padam]), written or implied.

`
a\R [vkyam] : sentence

M
noc qbR ` M
noc qbR ` hlmc qbR `
[subanta padam] [subanta padam] [tianta padam]
(noun) (noun) (verb)

`
o In understanding a sentence (a\R [vkyam]), `
the verb (hlmc qbR [tianta
padam]) should be identified first.
M
o All other words should be nouns (noc `
qbR [subanta padam]). They are all
connected to the verb, either directly or indirectly.
o By relating each noun to the verb, the meaning of the sentence is understood.

Note:
In this book the word "verb" refers to a hlmcR, ` or a "finite verb". A finite verb makes a
sentence complete. Even if a word (qb) is indicating an action, if it does not end with hlm-`
`
|e, thus ending with nqM -|e, that word is considered to be a noun, not a verb. This is
according to the P=inian Sanskrit grammar.

Assignment on Structure of Sanskrit Language:

Add these words to your vocabulary:
`
1) a\R [vkyam] 7) |e [pratyaya7]
`
2) qbR [padam] 8) [\l M [dhtu7]
3) qb\hQ [padni] 9) hlm-` |e [ti-pratyaya7]
`
4) hlmc qbR [tianta padam] `
10) |\hlqhbiR [prtipadikam]
M
5) noc `
qbR [subanta padam] `
11) nqM -|e [sup-pratyaya7]
6) |is hl [prak6ti7]

10
 Topic III Factors of action (i\jiR)`

Topic III
Factors of action
i\jiR `

`
Basic concepts of i\jiR [krakam] (Factors of action)

With reference to an action, there are factors which are directly related to the action.
They are called i\jis.

i\jis are six in number.

1. il\f [kart] (agent of action)

2. iRf [karma] (object of action)

3. ijR ` [kara=am] (instrument of action)

4. nb\QR ` [sampradnam] (recipient of action)

5. gq\b\QR ` [apdnam] (origin of action)

6. gh[ijR ` [adhikara=am] (locus of action)

Based on how a thing or person is related to a given action, the status of one of the
i\jis can be given to it.

i\ji and ha^hp [vibhakti] (case endings) are independent concepts. They are not
intrinsically connected.
o i\jis are factors involved in the accomplishment of action.
i\jis are independent from any language. Thus i\ji can be understood
without Sanskrit language.
o ha^hps are nominal suffixes in Sanskrit grammar.
ha^hps can express i\jis as well as things other than i\ji.

11
 Topic III Factors of action (i\jiR)`

1. il\f [kart] (Agent of action)

With reference to a given action, the agent, the one who does the action gets a
technical name il\f.

il\f is the primary factor related to the action.

e.g., 1) He sees the elephant.

- With reference to the action of seeing,

He is il\f.

e.g., 2) They see the elephant.

- With reference to the action of seeing,

They are il\f.

e.g., 3) Devadatta falls.

- With reference to the action of falling,

Devadatta is il\f.

e.g., 4) There are scriptures.

- With reference to the action of being,

Scriptures are il\f.

e.g., 5) Devadatta sees Somadatta, who is cooking.

- With reference to the action of seeing,

Devadatta is il\f.

- With reference to the action of cooking,

Somadatta is il\f.

12
 Topic III Factors of action (i\jiR)`

2. iRf [karma] (Object of action)

With reference to a given action, the object gets a technical name iRf.

e.g., 1) He sees the elephants.

- With reference to the action of seeing,

He is il\f.
The elephants are iRf.

e.g., 2) The elephants are seen by him.

- With reference to the action of seeing,

He is il\f.
The elephants are iRf.

e.g., 3) Devadatta goes to the village.

- With reference to the action of going,

Devadatta is il\f.
The village is iRf.

A destination of a going or moving action is also considered to be a iRf (object).

e.g., 4) Devadatta sees Somadatta who is cooking the rice.

- With reference to the action of seeing,

Devadatta is il\f.
Somadatta is iRf.

- With reference to the action of cooking,

Somadatta is il\f.
The rice is iRf.

13
 Topic III Factors of action (i\jiR)`

`
3. ijR [kara=am] (Instrument of action)

With reference to a given action, an instrument/means to accomplish the action gets a

technical name ijR.`

e.g., 1) Devadatta eats rice by hand.

- With reference to the action of eating,

Devadatta is il\f.
Rice is iRf.
The hand is ijR. `

e.g., 2) He goes to the village by bus.

- With reference to the action of going,

He is il\f.
The village is iRf.
Bus is ijR. `

e.g., 3) The bird is seen by him through binoculars.

- With reference to the action of seeing,

He is il\f.
The bird is iRf.
The binoculars are ijR. `

14
 Topic III Factors of action (i\jiR)`

`
4. nb\QR [sampradnam] (Recipient of action)

That recipient which the agent wants to connect with the object of the action of giving
gets a technical name nb\QR.`

e.g., 1) Devadatta gives money to the priest.

- With reference to the action of giving,

Devadatta is il\f.
Money is iRf.
The priest is nb\QR. `

The recipient of other actions, such as teaching, telling, showing, etc., is also nb\QR. `

e.g., 2) The teacher teaches the scripture to the student.

- With reference to the action of teaching,

The teacher is il\f.
The scripture is iRf.
The student is nb\QR. `

e.g., 3) He tells a story to the people.

- With reference to the action of telling,

He is il\f.
A story is iRf.
The people are nb\QR. `

e.g., 4) Devadatta gets ready for the journey.

- With reference to the action of getting ready,

Devadatta is il\f.
The journey is nb\QR. `

15
 Topic III Factors of action (i\jiR)`

`
5. gq\b\QR [apdnam] (Origin of action)

With reference to a given action which involves separation, the point from which the
separation takes place gets a technical name gq\b\QR.`

e.g., 1) An apple falls from the tree.

- With reference to the action of falling,

An apple is il\f.
The tree is gq\b\QR. `

e.g., 2) He goes to the village from a house.

- With reference to the action of going,

He is il\f.
The village is iRf.
A house is gq\b\QR. `

e.g., 3) Devadatta falls from a running horse.

- With reference to the action of falling,

Devadatta is il\f.
A running horse is gq\b\QR. `

- With reference to the action of running,

A horse is il\f.

16
 Topic III Factors of action (i\jiR)`

Something one fears, and something from which one has to protect oneself are also
gq\b\QR. `

e.g., 1) He is afraid of the snake.

- With reference to the action of being afraid,

He is il\f.
The snake is gq\b\QR. `

e.g., 2) Bhagavn protects people from q\q.

- With reference to the action of protecting,

Bhagavn is il\f.
People are iRf.
q\q is gq\b\QR. `

Cause of birth is also gq\b\QR. `

e.g., 1) Anger is born of desire.

- With reference to the action of being born,

Anger is il\f.
Desire is gq\b\QR. `

Teacher in formal learning is also gq\b\QR. `

e.g., 1) Students study the Vedas from the teacher.

- With reference to the action of studying,

Students are il\f.
The Vedas are iRf.
The teacher is gq\b\QR. `

17
 Topic III Factors of action (i\jiR)`

`
6. gh[ijR [adhikara=am] (Locus of action)

With reference to a given action, a locus of il\f or iRf in terms of place (bZw), time (i\),
subject (hake) gets a technical name gh[ijR.`

e.g., 1) He cooks in the kitchen.

- With reference to the action of cooking,

He is il\f.
The kitchen is gh[ijR. `

e.g., 2) He cooks rice in the pan.

- With reference to the action of cooking,

He is il\f.
Rice is iRf.
The pan is gh[ijR. `

e.g., 3) He swims in the swimming pool in front of the library.

- With reference to the action of swimming,

He is il\f.
The swimming pool is gh[ijR. `
The library is a referential point for the word in front of. Thus it is not
qualified to be called gh[ijR. `
e.g., 4) He sleeps at night.

- With reference to the action of sleeping,

He is il\f.
Night is gh[ijR. `

e.g., 5) In/with reference to RP, he has desire.

- With reference to the action of having,

He is il\f.
Desire is iRf.
RP is gh[ijR. `

18
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

Topic IV

The Concept of
`
Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

It is essential to know the concept of verbs. However, this topic can initially be
deferred by beginners. Topic V Conjugation in ` can be studied first, and Topic IV
The Concept of Verbs can be studied later.

`
1. What is verb (hlmcR [tiantam])?

`
In Sanskrit language, there are only two types of words, verb (hlmc qbR [tianta
M
padam]) and noun (noc `
qbR [subanta padam]).
`
Here, verb (hlmcR [tiantam]) `
is a word (qbR [padam]) which is the primary
element in the sentence, in a sense that all nouns are connected to the verb. For example, in
a sentence He sees an elephant in the forest with his friend., the verb sees is the
primary element of the sentence and all the nouns are connected to the verb, either
directly or indirectly.
`
To be exact, hlmcR [tiantam] is a finite verb, which completes a sentence. For
example, in the sentence He offers melted ghee into burning fire., offers is the finite
`
verb, (hlmcR [tiantam]). Melted and burning are considered to be participles.
Participle is a type of noun which qualifies other nouns in terms of action.

`
2. Constituents of verb (hlmcR [tiantam])

`
The literal meaning of hlmcR [tiantam] is that which ends (gc [anta]) with hlm `
[ti]. hlm ` [ti] is a type of suffix (|e [pratyaya7]), which can be called verbal suffix.
`
hlmcR [tiantam] consists of two elements:
`
Verb (hlmcR [tiantam])
= Root ([\l M [dhtu7]) + Verbal suffix (hlm|` e [ti-pratyaya7])

19
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

A [\l M [dhtu] is the basic element of hlmc. A [\l M indicates only an action. For
`
example, ^ [bh] is a [\l M and its meaning is to be. w [d6] is another [\l M and its
meaning is to see.
By suffixing different verbal suffixes (hlm-` |es) to a [\l M according to person and
number, different forms of verbs (hlmcs) are produced. This is what we call conjugation
of verb.

Observe how a verb is conjugated from a single [\l M into nine different forms by
suffixing nine different suffixes according to three types of person and three numbers.

[\l M (root) hlm`|e (verbal suffixes) `

hlmcR (verbs)
Singular Dual Plural
Number Sing- Plu-
Dual rd
Person ular ral 3 ^ahl ^al ^ahc
3rd person hlq ` ln ` h He is Those two are They are
^ + 2nd ^ahn ^a ^a
2nd person hnq ` n ` =
(to be) You are You two are You are
1st person hRq ` an ` Rn `
1st ^a\hR ^a\a ^a\R
I am We two are We are

Formation of hlmcR `
That which immediately precedes the suffix is called g [aga] (stem). So, when a
hlm-` |e [ti-pratyaya] is suffixed to a [\l M [dhtu], the [\l M is given the status of g [aga].
It is the g which then undergoes any necessary modifications based on the type of [\l,M
tense, etc. hlm|` es also undergo some changes based on the tense, mood, etc.

^ This is the original [\l M by itself.

([\l M )
^ + hlq ` A hlm-` |e is suffixed. Then [\l M gains the status of g.
(gR)` (|e )
^ + hl There are regulations to modify hlm-` |e according to tense, etc.
^a + hl There are regulations to modify g according to certain factors which
are discussed next.

20
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

3. Classifications of [\l M [dhtu] (Verbal root)

[\l M is the basic element in Sanskrit language and it indicates action itself.
There are about two thousand [\lsM defined by P=ini in a book called [\lqM \
[dhtup;ha7]. In the [\lqM \ , these [\lsM are classified in two ways according to the way
they conjugate. They are:
i. Ten groups of conjugations (1st L to 10th L)
ii. Three types (P, A, and U)

i. Ten Ls [ga=a]s (groups) of conjugation

When a [\l M is suffixed with a hlm-` |e, thus gaining the status of g [aga], it can
undergo one of ten different modification processes. 5 According to which of these ten
modification processes it intrinsically undergoes, a [\l M is classified into one of ten groups.
In Sanskrit, the word for group is L. Thus there are ten Ls of [\lsM called 1st L to 10th L.
More than a half of [\lsM belong to the 1st L (also called 1st conjugation).
The following chart is presented here just to illustrate that there are ten Ls of [\lsM
according to the ten different modification processes on g.

Modification process
L In Sanskrit
M on g
L Added |e Special change

1st \hb-L Yes g -

2nd gb\hb-L Yes & No - -

3rd M
}zP\hb-L Yes & No - Reduplication

4th hba\hb-L No e -

5th \hb-L No QP/Q M -

6th lbM \hb-L No g -

7th N[\hb-L No Q -

8th lQ\hb-L Yes / -

9th \hb-L No Q\/Q ` -

10th M
dj\hb-L Yes This becomes a new [\l M

5
Difference in modification process on g is seen only when conjugating in active voice (ilfhj
|ePL ), and , P, m`, hah[hm`, and wls/w\Qd. `
21
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

ii. Three types (P, A, and U)

As seen in the chart below, hlm-` |ees [ti-pratyaya]s are eighteen in number and
they are divided into two padas. The first set of nine suffixes is called Parasmai-pada
(qj -qb). The second set of nine suffixes is called tmane-pada (Q Z-qb).

hlm-` |es

qj -qb [parasmai-pada] Q Z-qb [tmane-pada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person `
hlq [tip] `
ln [tas] h [jhi] l [ta] `
l\R [tm] [jha]

2nd person `
hnq [sip] `
n [thas] [tha] `
\n [ths] `
\R [thm] `
R [dhvam]

1st person `
hRq [mip] `
an [vas] `
Rn [mas] ` [i;] ahz [vahi] Rhzm` [mahi]

The Parasmai-pada (qj -qb) are suffixed to some [\lsM , while tmane-pada (Q Z-
qb) are suffixed to some other [\lsM . 6
In this book, those [\lsM which take only Parasmai-pada (qj -qb) are classified as
type P. Such type of [\l M is called qj -qb [parasmai-pad], that which takes qj -qb.
Those [\lsM which take only tmane-pada (Q Z-qb) are classified as type A. Such
type of [\l M is called Q Z-qb [tmane-pad], that which takes Q Z-qb.
Those [\lsM which take both Parasmai-pada (qj -qb) and tmane-pada (Q-Z qb)
are classified as type U. Such type of [\l M is called ^e-qb [ubhaya-pad], that which takes
both qb.
For example, ^ [bh] is a [\l M [dhtu] indicating the action to be, listed in [\lqM \
[dhtup;ha7] under the 1st group (L [ga=a]), and it is classified as P, qj -qb [parasmai-
pad] because it takes only Parasmai-pada (qj -qb) suffixes. So, in a Sanskrit dictionary, it
`
is listed as ^ (1P) to be. b q [dp] is another [\l M indicating the action to shine, listed
under 4th L, and it is classified as A, Q Z-qb [tmane-pad], because it takes only
`
tmane-pada (Q Z-qb) suffixes. In a dictionary, it is listed as b q (4A) to shine. Similary
`
N[ [rudh] `
is listed as N[ (7U) to obstruct as it is under 7th L and takes both sets of
suffixes.

6
This difference in type is seen only in active voice.
22
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

4. Ten i\js [lakra]s

There are ten suffixes called i\js [lakra]s. They are:

1. ` [la;]
2. h ` [li;]
3. ` [lu;]
4. s ` [l6;]
5. P ` [lo;]
6. m ` [la]
7. hah[hm ` [vidhili]
8. w hfm ` [rli]
9 m ` [lu]
10. sm ` [l6]
Since they all have ` [l] in their names, they are conventionally called i\js
[lakra]s.
i\js [lakra]s are suffixed to a [\l M [dhtu].
E.g., ^ ([\l M ) + ` (one of the i\js)
i\j is to be substituted by hlm-` |e [ti-pratyaya].
`
E.g., ^ ([\l M ) + hlq ( ` is substituted by one of the hlm-` |es)
Since hlm-` |es are substitutes for i\j, all verbs (hlmcs) are originally made by
suffixing i\j to [\l.M

i\j [lakra] represents two things.

i. Voice (|ePL [prayoga7])
ii. Tense and mood
These voice and tense/mood are inherited by hlm-` |e and become a part of the
meaning of the verb. In other words, voice and tense/mood of a verb originate from i\j.

23
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

i. Voice (|ePL [prayoga7])

There are three voices for verb. They are:

a) Active voice (ilfhj |ePL [kartari prayoga7])
b) Passive voice (iRfh |ePL [karma=i prayoga7])
c) Impersonal voice (^\aZ |ePL [bhve prayoga7])
i\j denotes/indicates/corresponds to the agent (il\f [kart]) or object (iRf [karma])
of the action indicated by [\l,M to which i\j is suffixed. Occasionally, i\j also denotes
the action of the [\l M itself.

a) Active voice (ilfhj |ePL [kartari prayoga7])

When a i\j denotes the agent (il\f [kart]) of the action, the voice of verb is called
active voice, ilfhj |ePL [kartari prayoga7] in Sanskrit.
` see), i\j is suffixed. When this i\j denotes the
For example, to a [\l M w (to
agent of action of seeing, the verb created by this combination of [\l M and i\j will be
qehl (sees) and this verb is said to be in active voice, or ilfhj |ePL . This verb
corresponds to the agent. Just as He sees a bird., They see a bird., etc., and I am.,
You are, He is, etc., in English.

b) Passive voice (iRfh |ePL [karma=i prayoga7])

When a i\j denotes the object (iRf [karma]) of the action, the voice of verb is called
passive voice, iRfh |ePL [karma=i prayoga7] in Sanskrit.
` see), i\j is suffixed. When this i\j denotes the
For example, to a [\l M w (to
object of action of seeing, the verb created by this combination of [\l M and i\j will be
elZ (is seen), and this verb is said to be in passive voice, or iRfh |ePL . This verb
corresponds to the object. Just as The bird is seen by him., These birds are seen by him,
The bird is seen by them., etc., in English.

c) Impersonal voice (^\aZ |ePL [bhve prayoga7])

Since this voice is not seen very often in Sanskrit, and does not exist in English,
explanation of this is deferred for now.

24
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

ii. Tense and mood

i\js also express the tense (time) of the action taking place, or mood of the action
(how the action takes place).
The following list shows general usage of ten i\js in six tenses and four moods.
Note that these usages of tenses and moods are not always strictly observed in the
language.

1. ` can be used in present tense to express that the action is started and not finished yet.
2. h ` can be used in perfect past tense to express that the action is in the past which is
not witnessed by speaker.
3. ` can be used in first future tense to express that the action will be in the future but
not today.
4. s ` can be used in second future tense to express that the action is in the future in
general.
5. P ` can be used in imperative mood to express that the action is command, invitation,
prayer, etc.
6. m ` can be used in simple past tense to express that the action is in the past but not
today.
7. hah[hm ` can be used in potential mood to express that the action is command, invitation,
prayer, hypothetical, etc.
8. w hfm ` can be used in benedictive mood to express that the action is wished.
9. m ` can be used in general past tense to express that the action is in the past in general.
10. sm ` can be used in conditional mood to express that the action could happen,
conditionally.

25
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

5. Verbal suffix (hlm-` |e [ti-pratyaya7])

hlm-` |ees [ti-pratyaya]s are substitutes for i\j. Thus, hlm-` |ees inherit voice as
well as tense/mood from the original i\j. Because of this, hlm-` |ees also denote voice as
well as tense/mood.
hlm-` |ees further denote two more things.
M
i. Person (qNk [puru:a7])
`
ii. Number (adQR [vacanam])

M [puru:a7])
i. Person (qNk

There are three persons, as described in the chart below.

Person In Sanskrit Who? Examples

3rd person M
|R-qNk [prathama-puru:a7] Others he, she, it, they, tree, etc.

2nd person M
RR-qNk [madhyama-puru:a7] Listener you, you all

1st person M
tR-qNk [uttama-puru:a7] Speaker I, we

In the traditional Sanskrit grammar, the 3rd person is called |R-qNk

M (first person)
and listed first because the topic should come first. The speaker comes last (tR) and the
listener comes in between (RR).

`
ii. Number (adQR [vacanam])

There are three numbers, as described in the matrix with persons in the chart below.

Number Singular Dual Plural

vi-adQR ` h-adQR ` o-adQR `
Person [eka-vacanam] [dvi-vacanam] [bahu-vacanam]
3rd person he, she, it, tree they (two), two trees they (all), trees

2nd person you you (two) you (all)

1st person I we (two) we (all)

26
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

Two qbs [pada]s

There are eighteen hlm-` |es. As seen in the chart below, they are divided into two
sets of nine. They are:
qj -qb [parasmai-pada]
Q Z-qb [tmane-pada]
hlm-` |es

qj qb [parasmaipada] Q Zqb [tmanepada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person `
hlq [tip] `
ln [tas] h [jhi] l [ta] `
l\R [tm] [jha]

2nd person `
hnq [sip] `
n [thas] [tha] `
\n [ths] `
\R [thm] `
R [dhvam]

1st person `
hRq [mip] `
an [vas] `
Rn [mas] ` [i;] ahz [vahi] Rhzm` [mahi]

In active voice, either or both of the qbs are used according to the type of the [\l.M
For example, the [\l M ^ (1P) to be, being type P, qj qb , takes one of the qj qb suffixes
`
in active voice. b q (4A) to shine, being type A, Q Zqb , takes one of the QqZ b suffixes
`
in active voice. N[ (7U) to obstacle, being type U, ^eqb , takes both qj qb and QqZ b
suffixes in active voice.
In passive voice and impersonal voice, only Q Zqb suffixes are used regardless of
`
the type of the [\l.M For example, all [\lsM such as ^ (1P) to be, b q (4A) to shine, and N[ `
(7U) to obstruct take Q Zqb suffixes in passive voice and impersonal voice.

27
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

6. Objectives of learning hlmcR `

Many different hlmcs can be produced from one [\l.M Ten different i\js can be
suffixed to a [\l M in ten tenses and moods. Each i\j has three voices. Then, each i\j is
multiplied into three persons and three numbers. If the [\l M is type U, in active voice the
whole thing has to be multiplied by two.

1 [\l M
X 10 i\js (tenses and moods): present, past, future, imperative, etc.
X 2 |ePLs (voices): active, passive
M
X 3 qNks (persons): 3rd person, 2nd person, 1st person
X 3 adQs (numbers): singular, dual, plural
+ 10 forms in impersonal voice
= 190 forms of hlc (if the [\l M is type U, 280 forms) for a [\l M
See the chart on the next page for the breakdown and explanation.

Since there are so many forms of hlmc for each [\l,M one must be clear about the
objectives of learning hlmc.
The objectives are to be able to:
`
1) Locate the hlmc qbR (verb) in a sentence.
2) Identify the [\l M of the hlmc, and look it up in a dictionary.
3) Identify i\j, if possible.
4) Identify |ePL. This is very important.
M and adQ.
5) Identify qNk
After identifying these, the hlmc will be marked in the format of:
` [\l M + hlm ` (i\j /|ePL /qNk
hlmcR = M /adQR)`

E.g., ^ahl = ^ (1P) to be + /Active voice (ilfhj)/3rd person/Singular

To achieve these objectives, the student can firstly focus only on forms of the verb in:
` (present tense)/Active voice (ilfhj)/3rd person/Singular
` (present tense)/Passive voice (iRfh)/3rd person/Singular

28
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

7. Summary the formation of hlmcR `

Every single form of hlmc falls into one of the squares in this chart.

|ePL (voice) ilfhj iRfh ^\aZ

qj qb (P) Q Zqb (A) |e P A A A

1. ` (Present Tense) 9 9 9 1

2. h ` (Perfect Past Tense) 9 9 9 1

3. ` (First Future Tense) 9 9 9 1

4. s ` (Second Future Tense) 9 9 9 1

5. P ` (Imperative Mood) 9 9 9 1

6. m ` (Simple Past Tense) 9 9 9 1

7. hah[hm ` (Potential Mood) 9 9 9 1

8. w hfm ` (Benedictive Mood) 9 9 9 1

9. m ` (General Past Tense) 9 9 9 1

10. sm ` (Conditional Mood) 9 9 9 1

9 = 9 forms (3 persons x 3 numbers); 1 = only one form (3rd person singular) in impersonal voice.

In all ten i\js:

qj qb|es (P) are used for qj qb [\lsM in ilfhj |ePL.
ZQ Zqb|es (A) are used for ZQqZ b [\lsM in ilfhj |ePL.
ZQ Zqb|es (A) are used for all [\lsM in iRfh and ^\aZ |ePL.
The forms in iRfh and ^\aZ are identical.

In four i\js in the shaded area, namely , P, m,` and hah[hm:`

There are ten different manners of forming g according to ten groups of the [\l M in
ilfhj |ePL.
There is addition of e for all [\lsM in iRfh and ^\aZ |ePL.

In the other six i\js:

The ten groups of conjugations do not matter in the process of forming g.
There is no addition of e in iRfh and ^\aZ |ePL.
29
 `
Topic IV The Concept of Verbs (hlmcR [tiantam])

8. Steps in formation of hlmcR `

To form a hlmc, there should first be a haa\ [vivak:], intention, or desire to convey
something on the part of the speaker. According to the haa\, the elements of verb, namely
[\l,M i\j, |ePL, qNk,
M and adQ, are decided.

For example, if the speaker wants to convey he draws in Sanskrit, elements of the
verb will be:
[\l M : `
is k (1P) to draw
i\j : ` (Present tense) The action is happening at present.
|ePL : ilfhj |ePL (Active voice) The agent of the action is denoted by the verb.
M
qNk : M
|RqNk (3rd person) The agent is neither the speaker nor listener.
adQR ` : `
viadQR (Singular) The number of the agent is one.

Step 1) hlm-` |e is suffixed to a [\l M according to the details of haa\.

`
is k (1P) to draw + h (/ilfhj/3rd person/Plural)
Since the voice is active voice and the [\l M is type P, the 3rd person singular
hlm|` e of qj qb|es, which is hlq` is used.
Step 2) hlm-` |e is modified according to i\j.
` ghc
is k +
Step 3) g is modified according to L (group) and i\j.
ikf + ghc
That which precedes suffix is called g [aga].
Step 4) g and hlm-` |e are combined with sandhi rules, if applicable.
ikfhc

Assignment on the concept of verbs:

Add these words to your vocabulary: [\l M , L , i\j , |ePL , ilfhj |ePL , iRfh |ePL ,
M , |R-qNk
qNk M , RR-qNk M , adQR, ` vi-adQR, ` h-adQR, ` o-adQR `
M , tR-qNk

30
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

Topic V

Conjugation in ` (present tense)

At the beginning stage of studying verbs, it is essential to cover the conjugation in

` (present tense) in ilfhj (active voice) and iRfh (passive voice) with both qj qhb-[\lsM
and QqZ hb-[\lsM . In this book, the ready-made forms of g are provided because the
forming of g at the very beginning of Sanskrit study is not an efficient use of time. Actual
formation of not only verbs but also any word forms can be studied well through P=ini-
stras. Until then, the objectives of the study of verb should be clearly limited to these
points:
Being able to identify hlmc (verb) in a sentence
Understanding of the structures of hlmc (verb)
Being able to identify [\l M and consult the dictionary
Being able to identify |ePL (voice)
To achieve these goals, covering ` in this section is enough because the same
knowledge can be applied to other i\js.
After this section, it is recommended to defer studying the other i\js and start
studying nouns.

In this book, the abbreviations used for 3rd, 2nd, and 1st person are III, II, and I,
respectively.

31
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

1. ` (Present Tense) in ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice) with qj qb [\l M

(Parasmaipad dhtu7)

Type P [\lsM (qj qhb[\lsM ) in the 1st L (group)

When conjugating [\lsM in the 1st L in ` and ilfhj, the g takes L,

M if applicable.

Because an additional suffix g is suffixed to [\lsM in the 1st L, all the gs end with g.
The ready-made final forms of the gs are shown in the last column of the table below.

Original [\l M as [\l M in dictionary Meaning in English `

gR (stem) after
listed in [\lqM \ form modification
is k haZQ Z `
is k (1P) to draw, to plough ikf

L s Ll `
LR (1P) to go L

dj L f dj `(1P) to move, to walk dj

} a |\[\jZ `
} a (1P) to live }a

hw |ZZ `
w (1P) to see qe

R |Z w{Z d `
QR (1P) to salute QR

`
|\qZ Q (1U) to lead, to carry Qe

q p\e\ a\hd q ` (1P) to study q

ql Ll `
ql (1P) to fall ql

o[M gaLRQ Z `
o[M (1P) to know oP[

^ nt\e\R ` ^ (1P) to be ^a

a n hQa\nZ `
an (1P) to dwell an

\ LhlhQast \ (1P) to stay hl

s hdc\e\R ` s (1P) to remember j

32
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

qj qb of hlm-` |es modified for ` (present tense)

In -i\j, the original hlm-` |es are modified as seen in the following chart.

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
M
|RqNk III/1 III/2 III/3
rd
hl l ghc
(3 person)
M
RRqNk II/1 II/2 II/3
nd
hn
(2 person)
M
tRqNk I/1 I/2 I/3
st
hR a R
(1 person)

Assignment on Conjugation of qj qhb[\l M in 1st L in /ilfhj

For each [\l M in the table on the previous page, following the format for ^ [\l M given
below, combine the g and the hlm-` |es to make the final forms of verb. Observe rules
described under this chart.

[\l M (root) : `
^ nt\e\R (1P) to be
i\j (tense/mood) : ` (present tense)
|ePL (voice) : ilfhj-|ePL (active voice)
`
gR (stem) : ^a

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

III/1 III/2 III/3

M
|RqNk ^ahl ^al ^ahc *
rd
(3 person) He is Those two are They are

M
RRqNk II/1 II/2 II/3
^ahn ^a ^a
(2nd person) You are You two are You all are

I/1 I/2 I/3

M
tRqNk ^a\hR ** ^a\a ** ^a\R **
st
(1 person) I am We two are We are

* Within a word, when a short g is followed by a LM letter (g, v, or ), the latter one (the
M letter) is the substitute for both. In other words, short g + L
L M = L.
M
` R. `
** The last g of the g is elongated (b f ) when followed by a or
33
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

Assignment on Conjugation of qj qhb[\l M in /ilfhj

For these [\lsM in 4th and 6th L, make the same charts as for 1st L.
Do Exercise #1 in the last part of this book.

Type P [\lsM (qj qhb[\lsM ) in the 4th L (group)

M An additional suffix e is suffixed for [\lsM in the 4th L.
g does not take L.

Original [\l M as [\l M in dictionary Meaning in `

gR (stem) after
listed in [\lqM \ form English modification
gn M ZqZ `
gn (4P) to throw g

w gbwfQ Z `
Qw (4P) to perish Qe

l kM | l `
lkM (4P) to be pleased M
l_

Qsl L\haZq Z `
Qsl (4P) to dance Qs

qkM q
M `
qkM (4P) to nourish M
q_

RzM ahdZ RzM ` (4P) to be confused M

R

w kM wPkZ `
wkM (4P) to dry M
w_

Type P [\lsM (qj qhb[\lsM ) in the 6th L (group)

M An additional suffix g is suffixed for [\lsM in the 6th L.
g does not take L.
Original [\l M as [\l M in dictionary Meaning in `
gR (stem) after
listed in [\lqM \ form English modification
k M \e\R ` `
k (6P) to wish

hbw ghln}fQ Z `
hbw (6U) to show hbw

| \e\R ` | ` (6P) to ask qs

M RPZ
R d Rd `
M (6U) to set free M
Rr

hab \^Z hab ` (6U) to find ha

sw nwfQ Z `
sw (6P) to touch sw

h gjha\nZ `
h (6P) to write h

ha w |aZwQ Z `
haw (6P) to enter haw

ns} hanL `
ns} (6P) to create ns}

34
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

M
2. Consulting [\liPw [dhtukoa7]

[\lsM are defined by P=ini in his original book called [\lqM \ [dhtup;ha7]. [\li
M Pw

[dhtukoa7] is a book in which these [\lsM are arranged in Sanskrit alphabetical order.
One of the objectives of studying hlmc is to be able to identify the [\l M of a hlmc by
tracking back to the original form of the [\l.M Only then [\li
M Pw can be utilized.

The manners of modification of simple vowels (//)

While tracking back to the original form of the [\l M from the modified form in hlmc,
the understanding of the types of modification of simple vowels helps.

Manners of modification of simple vowels

Original
Modification

b f [drgha7] (Long vowel)

M [gu=a7] (g, v, )
L v g+j`
ashu [v6ddhi7] (, , ) +j`
`
e [ya=] (e, ` a, ` j,` )` e` a` j`

gea\e\a (ge, ` ga, ` e, ` a)` ge/e ` ga/a ` -

For example, by looking at }ehn, the first guess of the [\l M would be }e,` which is
M Pw . In that case, one can try to find }Z (je), h} (ji), or } (j) because
not found in [\li
`
the ay of }e (jay) is most probably a modification of e, i or . ay is the result
M form of i or .
of gea\e\a-nh from e. And e is a L
In the same logic, ^ [\l M is tracked back from ^ahl.
Similarly, from ljhl, when lj` is not found as a [\l,M one can infer that the [\l M
M modification of or .
would be ls (t6) or l (t) because ar of lj` could be a L
Exactly the same thing can be said to zjhl to find (h6) [\l.M
In the case of wPdhl, when wPd` is not found as [\l,M wd `
M (uc) can be guessed
M in the 1st conjugation.
because a penultimate // of a [\l M can take L

M
Assignment on [\liPw
Do Exercise #2 in the last part of this book.

35
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

3. qnL\f [upasarg7] (Verbal prefixes)

There is a group of twenty-two particles called |\hb-L [prdi-ga=a], a group (L)

whose first member (hb) is | [pra], as follows:

1. | [pra] 2. qj\ [par] 3. gq [apa] `

4. nR [sam] 5. gQ M [anu]
6. ga [ava] `
7. hQn [nis] 8. hQj `[nir] `
9. n [dus] 10. j `[dur]
11. ha [vi] 12. m ` [] 7 13. hQ [ni] 14. gh[ [adhi] 15. ghq [api]
16. ghl [ati] 17. n M [su] 18. b ` [ud] 19. gh^ [abhi] 20. |hl [prati]
21. qhj [pari] 22. q [upa]

When a particle in the |\hb-L is used together with a [\l,M it is called an qnLf
[upasarga]. An qnLf may change the meaning, may not change the meaning, or may
enhance the meaning of a [\l M to which it is added.

E.g., 1: ^ (1P) to be
` ^ = to be possible
gQ M + ^ = to experience; gh^ + ^ = to overwhelm; | + ^ = to appear; nR +

E.g., 2: (1U) to take away

+ = to eat; b ` + + = to illustrate; qhj + = to avoid; | + = to attack; ha + = to
` = to withdraw; q + nR +
sport; ha + ga + = to deal with; nR + ` = to summarize

Assignment on qnL\f
Try to memorize the 22 members of the |\hb-L.
Do Exercise #3 in the last part of this book.

7
The final m` of m` is an indicatory letter and is removed. Thus only is seen in use.
36
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

4. ` (Present Tense) in ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice) with Q Zqb [\l M (tmanepad root)

Type A [\lsM (QqZ hb[\lsM ) in the 1st L (group)

M if applicable.
The formation of g is the same as for type P. The g takes L,
Because an additional suffix g is suffixed to [\lsM in the 1st L, all the gs end with g.

Original [\l M as [\l M in dictionary Meaning in `

gR (stem) after
listed in [\lqM \ form English modification
bwfQ Z ` (1A) to see

i\ b `
i\w (1A) to shine i\w

o\[s \Q Z `
o\[ (1A) to negate o\[

^\k p\e\ a\hd `

^\k (1A) to speak ^\k

RbM zk RbM ` (1A) to rejoice RPb

el |e Z `
el (1A) to strive el

jR M \e\R ` `
jR (1A) to play, to rejoice jR

`
M^ k \^Z `
^ (1A) to obtain ^

asl M alfQ Z `
asl (1A) to be alf

whi w \e\R ` ` ` (1A)

wmi to doubt `
wmi

w^M b `
w^M (1A) to shine wP^

kz Rkf Z nz ` (1A) to suffer nz

kZas nZaQ Z `
nZa (1A) to serve nZa

37
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

Q Zqb of hlm-` |es modified for ` (present tense)

In -i\j, the original hlm-` |es are modified as seen in the following chart.

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk III/1 III/2 III/3
rd
lZ lZ gcZ
(3 person)

M
RRqNk II/1 II/2 II/3
nd
nZ Z Z
(2 person)

M
tRqNk I/1 I/2 I/3
st
v azZ RzZ
(1 person)

Assignment on Conjugation of Q Zqhb[\l M in 1st L in /ilfhj

` ,M make this chart for each [\l M in the table.
Following this format for ^ [\l

[\l M (root) : `
^ (1A) to gain
i\j (tense/mood) : ` (present tense)
|ePL (voice) : ilfhj-|ePL (active voice)
`
gR (stem) : ^

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk ^lZ III/1 ^Zl Z III/2
*** ^cZ III/3
*
rd
(3 person) He gains Those two gain They gain

M
RRqNk ^nZ II/1 ^Z Z II/2
*** ^Z II/3

(2nd person) You gain You two gain You all gain

I/1
M
tRqNk ^Z * ^\azZ I/2 ** ^\RzZ I/3 **
(1st person) I gain We two gain We gain

* and ** - The manners of modifications are the same as qj qb [\lsM .

M letter
*** - The last g of the g, and the beginning of the |e, are substituted by v (a L
M
of the two). (Ref. L-Sandhi in Volume 2.)

38
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

Type A [\lsM (QqZ hb[\lsM ) in the 4th L (group)

M An additional
The formation of g is the same as for type P. g does not take L.
suffix e is suffixed for [\lsM in the 4th L.

Original [\l M as [\l M in dictionary Meaning in `

gR (stem) after
listed in [\lqM \ form English modification
}Q |\^\fa Z `
}Q (4A) to be born }\e

b q b `
b q (4A) to shine b

qb Ll qb ` (4A) to gain qx

o [M gaLRQ Z `
o[M (4A) to know M
o

R Q \Q Z `
RQ (4A) to consider R

e [M n|z\jZ `
e[M (4A) to fight M
e

ha b nt\e\R ` hab ` (4A) to be hax

ns} hanL `
ns} (4A) to create ns

Assignment on Conjugation of Q Zqhb[\l M in /ilfhj

Do Exercises #4 and #5 in the last part of this book.

39
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

5. ` (Present Tense) in ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice) with common [\lsM

The following [\lsM are frequently seen in scriptures, but their conjugation is not
analyzed in this book due to the complication in the process of conjugation. It is
recommended to become familiar with these forms, especially the forms in 3rd person
singular.

` be (2P) in ` (Present Tense) ilfhj-|ePL (Active Voice)

M gn to
gn ^ha

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk gh III/1 III/2
nhc III/3

(3rd person) He is Those two are They are

II/1 II/2 II/3

M
RRqNk ghn
(2nd person) You are You two are You all are

I/1 I/2 I/3

M
tRqNk gh
(1st person) I am We two are We are

`
Mis ijZ is to do (8U) in ` (Present Tense) ilfhj-|ePL (Active Voice)
Since is is type U, ^eqb [\l M , two sets of forms are seen; one with qj qb suffixes
and the other with QqZ b suffixes.

qj qb\hQ Q Zqb\hQ
viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
|RqNk ijPhl III/1 iMNl III/2
iMafhc III/3 iMNlZ III/1 iMa\fl Z III/2
iMafl Z III/3

(3rd person) He does Those two do They do He does Those two do They do

M
RRqNk ijPhk II/1 iMN II/2
iMN II/3 iMNkZ II/1 iMa\f Z II/2
iMNZ II/3

(2nd person) You do You two do You all do You do You two do You all do

M
tRqNk ijPhR I/1 iMaf I/2
iMRf I/3
iMa I/1
iMafzZ I/2
iMRfzZ I/3

(1st person) I do We two do We do I do We two do We do

40
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

\ gaoP[Q Z \ to know (9P) in ` (Present Tense) ilfhj-|ePL (Active Voice)

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk }\Q\hl III/1 }\Q l III/2
}\Qhc III/3

He knows Those two know They know

(3rd person)
II/1 II/2 II/3
M
RRqNk }\Q\hn }\Q }\Q
You know You two know You all know
(2nd person)
I/1 I/2 I/3
M
tRqNk }\Q\hR }\Q a }\Q R
I know We two know We know
(1st person)

` pervade (5P) in ` (Present Tense) ilfhj-|ePL (Active Voice)

q \ q to

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
III/1 III/2 III/3
M
|RqNk Phl lM M
ahc
He gains Those two gain They gain
(3rd person)
II/1 II/2
M
RRqNk Phk M M II/3
You gain You two gain You all gain
(2nd person)
I/1 I/2 I/3
M
tRqNk PhR aM RM
I gain We two gain We gain
(1st person)

hab \Q Z hab ` to know (2P) in ` (Present Tense) ilfhj-|ePL (Active Voice)

There are two forms for each person and number.

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
III/1 III/2
M
|RqNk aZb/aZht aZbl M /hat ha /habhc III/3
He knows Those two know They know
(3rd person)
II/1 II/2 II/3
M
RRqNk aZ/aZh aZb M /ha hab/ha
You know You two know You all know
(2nd person)
I/1 I/2 I/3
M
tRqNk aZb/aZh ha/ha ha /ha
I know We two know We know
(1st person)

41
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

`
p\e\ a\hd to say (2U) in ` (Present Tense) ilfhj-|ePL (Active Voice)
When the first five qj qb suffixes follow, there are two forms.

qj qb\hQ Q Zqb\hQ
viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
|RqNk a hl/ l / aM hc/ l Z III/1 a\lZ III/2 aM lZ III/3
(3rd person) z III/1 zl M III/2
z III/3 He says Those two They say

He says Those two say They say say

M
RRqNk a hk/ / II/3 k Z II/1 aM \Z II/2 Z II/3
II/1 II/2
(2nd person) z M You all You say You two say You all say

You say You two say say

M
tRqNk a hR I/1 a I/2
R I/3
aM Z I/1
azZ I/2
RzZ I/3
(1st person) I say We two say We say I say We two say We say

` Z b\ to give (3U) in ` (Present Tense) ilfhj-|ePL (Active Voice)

Mb\ b\Q

qj qb\hQ Q Zqb\hQ
viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
|RqNk bb\hl III/1 bt III/2
bbhl III/3 btZ III/1
bb\lZ III/2 bblZ III/3
(3rd person) He gives Those two They give He gives Those two They give
give give

M
RRqNk bb\hn II/1 b II/2
b II/3
b Z II/1 bb\Z II/2 b Z II/3
(2nd person) You give You two You all give You give You two give You all give
give

M
tRqNk bb\hR I/1 b I/2
b I/3
bbZ I/1 bzZ I/2 b zZ I/3
(1st person) I give We two We give I give We two give We give
give

Assignment on Conjugation of common [\lsM in /ilfhj

Try to find the forms in this section of hlmc in Bhagavadgt.

42
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

6. ` (Present Tense) iRfh |ePL (Passive Voice)

iRfh |ePL (Passive Voice) is used to denote the iRf (object) of action.
E.g., L} elZ S (The elephant is seen.)
Because iRf (object) is required in the construction, the [\l M has to be a niRfi-[\l M
[sakarmaka-dhtu7], that which indicates an action which takes an object. In some
dictionaries, niRfi-[\l M is indicated as v.t., transitive verb.

Formation of g in iRfh |ePL

M modification on the [\l.M The formation is
e is added to the [\l,M and there is no L
the same as the formation used for the [\lsM in 4th L.
hlm-` |e in iRfh |ePL
Q Zqb suffixes are used, regardless of the type of the [\l M (P, A, and U). Original
hlm-` |es are modified according to the i\j.
Combining the g and hlm-` |e
The modifications are the same as those seen in QqZ b [\lsM .

[\l M (root) : `
w (1P) to see
i\j (tense/mood) : ` (present tense)
|ePL (voice) : iRfh |ePL (passive voice)
`
gR (stem) : e

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
III/1 III/2 III/3
M
|RqNk elZ eZl Z ecZ
(3rd person) He is seen Those two are seen They are seen
II/1 II/2 II/3
M
RRqNk enZ eZ Z eZ
(2nd person) You are seen You two are seen You all are seen
I/1
M
tRqNk eZ e\azZ I/2 e\RzZ I/3

(1st person) I am seen We two are seen We are seen

43
 Topic V Conjugation in ` (Present tense)

Assignment on Conjugation of common [\lsM in /iRfh

Following the format, make a chart for each one of the [\lsM listed below.
Do Exercise #6 in the last part of this book.

L s Ll `
LR (1P) to reach LlZ (It is reached), LZl,Z LcZ ...
q p\e\ a\hd q ` (1P) to study q lZ (It is studied), q lZ ,Z q cZ ...
gn M ZqZ `
gn (4P) to throw glZ (It is thrown), gZl,Z gcZ...
k M \e\R ` `
k (6P) to wish _lZ (It is wished), _Zl,Z _cZ ...
M RPZ
R d Rd `
M (6U) to set free R M lZ (It is freed), R M lZ ,Z R M cZ ...
`
h gjha\nZ h (6P) to write h lZ (It is written), h lZ ,Z h cZ ...
\ gaoP[Q Z \ (9P) to know \elZ (It is known), \eZl,Z \ecZ ...
w wp wi ` (5P) to be able wlZ (It is possible to be done), wZl,Z wcZ ...
bwfQ Z `
(1A) to see lZ (It is seen), lZ ,Z cZ ...
o\[s \Q Z `
o\[ (1A) to negate o\lZ (It is negated), o\Zl,Z o\cZ ...

7. ^\aZ |ePL (Impersonal Voice)

^\aZ |ePL (Impersonal Voice) is used to denote the action of the [\l M itself.
The [\l M in ^\aZ |ePL should be an giRfi-[\l M [akarmaka-dhtu7], that which
indicates an action which does not take an object. E.g., to be, to become, to stand, to sit, to
sleep, etc.). In some dictionaries, giRfi-[\l M is indicated as v.i., intransitive verb.
Also, when iRf (object) is not intended to be told, niRfi-[\l M can be used in ^\aZ |ePL
The steps of formation of hlmc are the same as the steps used in iRfh |ePL.
Action itself is denoted in ^\aZ |ePL. Since action is neither the speaker nor the
listener, and does not have any number, only 3rd person singular forms are seen in ^\aZ |ePL.
E.g., lZ III/1 gh Q\ 3/1 S (Burning is done by fire.)8

E.g., elZ III/1 bZabtZQ 3/1 S (Seeing is done by Devadatta.)

` lRf 0` hahQLfl\R III/1

E.g., hQ}Lsz\l 5/1 ` S (Leaving from own house quickly has to be done.)

8
There is a regulation which tells that an undenoted il\f should be told in the 3rd case. Because the
il\f of the action is not denoted by the hlm`-|e, the il\f is told in the 3rd case. (P=ini-stra 2.3.18)
44
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

Topic VI

Conjugation in other i\js

Since the main objectives so far have been covered by studying -i\j, beginner
M
students should defer studying this section and move onto the next section, nocs and
ha^hp-g.f They should come back to this section after completing the section on declension
`
of vowel-ending |\hlqhbis. It is recommended to study the Vowel Sandhi (gd-nh ) section
of Volume 2 of this series before studying this section.

The basic concept of forming hlmc is the same throughout all the i\js:
Modification of hlm-` |e
o hlm-` |es are modified according to i\j.
o There is similarity in modification among the i\js which have ` at the end. i.e.
`
, h, , s, and P. They are also known as hl-i\js.
o There is similarity in modification among the i\js which have m ` at the end. i.e.
`
m,` hah[hm,` w hfm,` m,` and sm.` They are also known as hml-i\js.
`
o Note that the last n becomes :, hanLf.
Modification of g
o For , P, m,` and hah[hm,` the modified forms of g are common.
In active voice, the modification is done according to ten Ls of the [\l.M
In passive voice, regardless of the L, e is added to the g without causing
M
L.
o For other i\js (h, , s, w hfm,` m,` and sm)` , the classification of ten Ls
does not make any difference.
In passive voice, e is not added to the g.
Combination of g and hlm-` |e
o The rules observed in combining g and hlm-` |e are applied for all i\js.

45
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

1. h ` (Perfect Past Tense)

h ` (Perfect Past Tense) is used to express an action in the past which the speaker
did not see directly (qjPZ).

Modification of hlm-` |es in h `

hlm-` |es modified for h `

qj qb [parasmaipada] Q Zqb [tmanepada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person g gl M v lZ jZ
2nd person g M g nZ Z Z
1st person g a R v azZ RzZ

In qj qb, the |es are changed completely. Everything is the same as ` in Q Zqb.
If the [\l M ends with , III/1 and I/1 of qj qb are changed to . Thus ashu-nh takes
place between and , resulting in together.

Modification of g in h `
`
hR (Duplication) of the [\l M takes place when applicable.
When h takes place, an extra syllable similar to the [\l M is observed before the [\l.M

` be (2P) in h ` (Perfect Past Tense) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

^ to be (1P) and gn to
`
* gn declines in the same manner as ^ in h.

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
III/1 III/2 III/3
M
|RqNk o^a o^al M o^a M
(3rd person) He was Those two were They were

M
RRqNk o^ha II/1 o^a M II/2
o^a II/3

(2nd person) You were You two were You all were
I/1 I/2
M
tRqNk o^a o^haa o^haR I/3
(1st person) I was We two were We were

46
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

LR Ll `
LR (1P) to go }L\R (he went), } Rl M , } R M ...
a d qhj^\kZ `
ad (2P) to speak a\d (he spoke), dlM M , d M ...
| \e\R ` | ` (6P) to ask q| (he asked), q| l M , q| ...
e\ |\qZ e\ (2P) to go ee (he went), eel M , ee M ...
` Z
b\ b\Q b\ (1P) to give bb (he gave), bbl M , b ...
`
M[\ [\jqPkeP [\ (3U) to put, to grant b[ (he granted), b[l M , b[ M ...
\ w{\h n PLeP \ (1P) to blow b (he blew), b l M , b M ...

w^M b `
w^M (1A) to shine M ^M Z (he shone), ww
ww M ^M \lZ, ww
M hM ^jZ,
M hM ^kZ, ww
ww M ^M \Z, ww
M hM ^Z, ww
M ^M ,Z ww
M hM ^azZ, ww
M hM aRzZ
`
M^ k \^Z `
^ (1A) to obtain Z^ Z (he gained), Z^\lZ, Zh^jZ

Assignment on Conjugation in h `
Observe the forms in 3rd person singular.
Do the h ` portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.

47
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

2. ` (First Future Tense)

` (First Future Tense) is used to express an action in the remote future, i.e., not of
today. hlmcs in ` are rarely seen.

Modification of hlm-` |es in `

hlm-` |es modified for `

qj qb [parasmaipada] Q Zqb [tmanepada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person l\ l\j l\j l\ l\j l\j

2nd person l\hn l\ l\ l\nZ l\n\Z l\Z
1st person l\h l\ l\ l\zZ l\zZ l\lZ

hlm-` |es modified for ` are used as a basis.

M are further modified, and they are the same for both qbs.
The forms in |RqNk
l\n,` an additional suffix to the [\l,M is attached to hlm-` |es in this chart.

Modification of g in `
` added to [\l.M If the [\l M is marked S in [\li
l\n is M Pw , is added before l\n. `
M takes place if applicable.
L

` be (2P) in ` (First Future Tense) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

^ to be (1P) and gn to
`
* gn declines in the same manner as ^ in .

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
III/1 III/2 III/3
M
|RqNk ^hal\ ^hal\j ^hal\j
(3rd person) He will be Those two will be They will be
II/1 II/2 II/3
M
RRqNk ^hal\hn ^hal\ ^hal\
(2nd person) You will be You two will be You all will be

M
tRqNk ^hal\h I/1 ^hal\ I/2
^hal\ I/3

(1st person) I will be We two will be We will be

48
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

q p\e\ a\hd q ` (1P) to study qhl\ (he will study), qhl\j, qhl\j , qhl\hn, ...
RbM zk RbM ` (1A) to rejoice RPhbl\ (he will rejoice), RPhbl\j, RPhbl\j ,
RPhbl\nZ, RPhbl\n\\R, ` RPhbl\Z, RPhbl\zZ, RPhbl\zZ, RPhbl\zZ
}Q |\^\fa Z `
}Q (4A) to be born }hQl\ (he will be born), }hQl\j, }hQl\j ,
}hQl\nZ, }hQl\n\\R, ` }hQl\Z

Assignment on Conjugation in `
` + l\n +
Observe the elements in the forms. E.g., ^a + ` hR, q ` + + l\n +
` hR, etc.

Do the ` portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.

49
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

3. s ` (Second Future Tense)

s ` (Second Future Tense) is used to express an action in the future in general.

Modification of hlm-` |es in s `

hlm-` |es modified for s `

qj qb [parasmaipada] Q Zqb [tmanepada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person hl l hc lZ Zl Z cZ
2nd person hn nZ Z Z Z
1st person \hR \a \R Z \azZ \RzZ

hlm-` |es modified for ` are used as a basis.

, an additional suffix to the [\l M is attached to hlm-` |es in this chart.

Modification of g in s `
is added to [\l.M If the [\l M is marked S in [\li
M Pw , is added before . In this

case, becomes _, together resulting in _.

M takes place if applicable.
L

` be (2P) in s ` (Second Future Tense) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

^ to be (1P) and gn to
`
* gn declines in the same manner as ^ in s.

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
III/1 III/2 III/3
M
|RqNk ^ha_hl ^ha_l ^ha_hc
(3rd person) He will be Those two will be They will be

II/1 II/2 II/3

M
RRqNk ^ha_hn ^ha_ ^ha_
(2nd person) You will be You two will be You all will be

M
tRqNk ^ha_\hR I/1 ^ha_\a I/2
^ha_\R I/3

(1st person) I will be We two will be We will be

50
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

L s Ll `
LR (1P) to go LhR_hl (he will go), LhR_l , LhR_hc ...
ab p\e\ a\hd ab ` (1P) to say, to tell ahb_hl (he will say), ahb_l , ahb_hc ...
` Z
b\ b\Q b\ (1P) to give b\hl (he will give), b\l , b\hc ...
`
Mis ijZ is (8U) to do ihj_hl (he will do), ihj_l , ihj_hc ...
/ihj_lZ, ihj_Zl,Z ihj_cZ, ihj_nZ, ihj_Z,Z ihj_Z, ihj_Z, ihj_\azZ, ihj_\RzZ
RbM zk RbM ` (1A) to rejoice RPhb_lZ (he will rejoice), RPhb_Zl,Z RPhb_cZ
`
M^ k \^Z `
^ (1A) to obtain lZ (he will obtain), lZ ,Z cZ
}Q |\^\fa Z `
}Q (4A) to be born }hQ_lZ (he will be born), }hQ_Zl,Z }hQ_cZ

Assignment on Conjugation in s `
Observe the elements in the forms and try to conjugate the above [\lsM for yourself.
` _ + hl (For combining g and hlm-` |e, the same rules are for ` are
E.g., ^a +
applied.)
Do the s ` portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.

51
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

4. P ` (Imperative Mood)

P ` (Imperative Mood) is used to express a command, wish, etc.

Modification of hlm-` |es in P `

hlm-` |es modified for P `

qj qb [parasmaipada] Q Zqb [tmanepada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person lM l\R ` gc M l\R ` l\R/l\R ` gc\R/gl\R `

2nd person -/hz lR ` l \R/\R ` R `
1st person hQ a R az Rz

In qj qb,
of III/1 and III/3 becomes .
There will be no suffix for II/1 if the g ends with g. Otherwise, hz is the suffix.
Others are like m.`
M is added before suffix.
For tRqNk,
In Q Zqb,
The modified forms for ` are used as the basis for further modifications.
v at the end becomes R. `
M v at the end becomes .
In tRqNk,
For II/1 and II/3, the suffixes are and R, ` respectively.

Modification of g in P `
The formation of g is the same as for ` (present tense) in both ilfhj and iRfh
|ePLs.

52
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

^ nt\e\R ` ^ to be (1P) in P ` (Imperative Mood) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk ^al M III/1
^al\R ` III/2 ^ac M III/3

(3rd person) May he be May those two be May they be

M
RRqNk ^a II/1
^alR ` II/2
^al II/3

(2nd person) May you be May you two be May you all be

I/1 I/2 I/3

M
tRqNk ^a\hQ ^a\a ^a\R
(1st person) May I be May we two be May we be

M
gn M ^ha `
gn (2P) to be g,M \R, ` nc,M vh[, R, ` , gn\hQ, gn\a, gn\R
L s Ll `
LR (1P) to go Ll M (May he go), Ll\R, ` Lc...
M

ab p\e\ a\hd ab ` (1P) to say, to tell abl,M abl\R, ` abc M ...

q p\e\ a\hd q ` (1P) to study ql,M ql\R, ` qc M ...
hw |ZZ `
w (1P) to see qel,M qel\R, ` qec M ...
\ LhlhQast \ (1P) to stay hll,M hll\R, ` hlc...
M

s hdc\e\R ` s (1P) to remember jl,M jl\R, ` jc M ...

w gbwfQ Z `
Qw (4P) to perish Qel,M Qel\R, ` Qec M ...
ns} hanL `
ns} (6P) to create ns}l,M ns}l\R, ` ns}c M ...
`
Mis ijZ is (8U) to do ijPl,M iMNl\R, ` iMafc,M iMN, iMNlR, ` iMNl, ija\h, ija\a, ija\R
/iMNl\R, ` iMa\fl\R, ` iMafl\R, ` iMN , iMa\f\R i
` M NR, ` ija, ija\az, ija\Rz

RbM zk RbM ` (1A) to rejoice RPbl\R, ` RPbZl\R, ` RPbc\R, ` RPb, RPbZ\R, ` RPbR, `
RPb, RPb\az, RPb\Rz
jR M \e\R ` `
jR (1A) to play, to rejoice
jRl\R, ` jRZl\R, ` jRc\R
`
`
M^ k \^Z `
^ (1A) to obtain ^l\R, ` ^Zl\R, ` ^c\R
`

}Q |\^\fa Z `
}Q (4A) to be born }\el\R, ` }\eZl\R, ` }\ec\R
`

RQ \Q Z `
RQ (4A) to consider Rl\R, ` RZl\R, ` Rc\R ...
`

53
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

P ` (Imperative Mood) iRfh |ePL (Passive Voice)

L s Ll `
LR (1P) to go `
Ll\R (May it be reached), LZl\R, ` Lc\R, `
L, LZ\R, ` LR, ` L , L\az, L\Rz
q p\e\ a\hd q `(1P) to study q l\R, ` q lZ \R, ` q c\R ...
`

k M \e\R ` `
k (6P) to wish _l\R, ` _Zl\R, ` _c\R ...
`

M RPZ
R d `
M (6U)
Rd to set free R M l\R, ` R M lZ \R, ` R M c\R ...
`

\ gaoP[Q Z \ (9P) to know \el\R, ` \eZl\R, ` \ec\R ...

`

w wp wi ` (5P) to be able wl\R, ` wZl\R, ` wc\R ...

`

bwfQ Z `
(1A) to see l\R, ` lZ \R, ` c\R ...
`
`
M^ k \^Z `
^ (1A) to obtain Ol\R, ` OZl\R, ` Oc\R
`
`
R k nzQ Z `
R (1A) to pardon l\R, ` Zl\R, ` c\R ...
`

Assignment on Conjugation in P `
Observe the elements in the forms and try to conjugate the above [\lsM for yourself.
Do the P ` portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.

54
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

5. m ` (Simple Past Tense)

m ` (Simple Past Tense) is used to express an action in the past, but not of today.

Modification of hlm-` |es in m `

hlm-` |es modified for m `
`
This is the standard for i\js with m ` at the end (hml-i\j).

qj qb [parasmaipada] Q Zqb [tmanepada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person l` l\R ` gQ ` l l\R ` gc

2nd person : lR ` l \ \R ` R `
1st person gR ` a R ahz Rhz

In qj qb,
III/2, II/2, II/3, I/1 becomes l\R, ` lR, ` l, gR, ` respectively.
` the end disappear. For III/3, l also
For others, and n at ` disappears.
In Q Zqb,
III/3 becomes gc.
Others remain in the original forms.

Modification of g in m `
The formation of g is the same as for ` (present tense) in both ilfhj and iRfh
|ePLs.
An augment g is added before the [\l.M
` LR (1P)
E.g., gLl = ` ` ilfhj/III/1
+ m/
` Qw (4P)
E.g., | + gQel = ` ` ilfhj/III/1
+ m/
Note that the augment comes before the [\l,M not the qnLf.
If the [\l M begins with vowel, is added and ashu takes place with the beginning
letter of the [\l.M
`
E.g., l = (1A) ` ilfhj/III/1
+ m/

55
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

^ nt\e\R ` ^ to be (1P) in m ` (Simple Past Tense) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk g^al ` III/1 g^al\R ` III/2 g^aQ ` III/3
(3rd person) He was Those two were They all were

M
RRqNk g^a II/1
g^alR ` II/2
g^al II/3

(2nd person) You were You two were You all were

M
tRqNk g^aR ` I/1 g^a\a I/2
g^a\R I/3

(1st person) I was We two were We all were

` be (2P) in m ` (Simple Past Tense) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

M gn to
gn M ^ha

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk n l ` III/1 \R ` III/2 nQ ` III/3
(3rd person) He was Those two were They all were

M
RRqNk n II/1
R ` II/2
II/3

(2nd person) You were You two were You all were

M
tRqNk nR ` I/1 I/2
I/3

(1st person) I was We two were We all were

L s Ll `
LR (1P) to go `
gLl (he went), gLl\R, ` gLQ...`
ab p\e\ a\hd ab ` (1P) to say `
gabl (he `
said), gabl\R, ` gabQ ...
hw |ZZ `
w (1P) to see `
gqel (he `
saw), gqel\R, ` gqeQ ...
\ LhlhQast \ (1P) to stay ghll, ` ghll\R, ` ghlQ...`
w gbwfQ Z `
Qw (4P) `
to perish gQel, ` gQel\R, ` gQeQ ...
ns} hanL `
ns} (6P) to create gns}l, ` gns}l\R,gns `
` }Q ...
`
Mis ijZ is (8U) to do gijPl, ` giMNl\R, ` giMafQ, ` gijP , giMNlR, ` giMNl, gijaR, ` giMaf, giMRf
` M afl, giM\f , giMa\f\R gi
/giMNl, giMa\fl\R,gi ` M NR, ` giMhaf, giMafhz, giMRfhz

bwfQ Z `
(1A) to see l, Zl\R, ` c, \ , Z\R, ` R, ` Z, ahz, Rhz
56
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

RbM zk RbM ` (1A) to rejoice gRPbl, gRPbZl\R, ` gRPbc

}Q |\^\fa Z `
}Q (4A) to be born g}\el, g}\eZl\R, ` g}\ec

m ` (Simple past tense) iRfh |ePL (Passive Voice)

L s Ll `
LR (1P) to go gLl (It has been reached), gLZl\R, ` gLc ...
q p\e\ a\hd q ` (1P) to study gq l (It has been studied), gq lZ \R, ` gq c ...
hw |ZZ `
w (1P) to see gel, geZl\R, ` gec ...
bwfQ Z `
(1A) to see l, lZ \R, ` c ...
RQ \Q Z `
RQ (4A) to consider gRl, gRZl\R, ` gRc ...

Assignment on Conjugation in m `
Observe the elements in the forms and try to conjugate the above [\lsM for yourself.
Do the m ` portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.

57
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

6. hah[hm ` (Potential Mood)

hah[hm ` (Potential Mood) is used to express a command, wish, etc., and also is used
`
in making a conditional or hypothetical sentence. E.g., e j jZl l w\hc \l S` (If one
remembers vara, there will be happiness for him.)

Modification of hlm-` |es in hah[hm `

hlm-` |es modified for hah[hm `

qj qb [parasmaipada] Q Zqb [tmanepada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person l/e\l ` l\R/e\l\R ` e M /e M l e\l\R ` jQ `

2nd person /e\ lR/e\lR ` l/e\l \n ` e\\R ` R `
1st person eR/e\R ` a/e\a R/e\R e ahz Rhz

`
The standard |es for hml are used as a basis.
In qj qb,
e\ is attached before the |es.
M .`
III/3 becomes en
If the g is ending with g, the e\ is replaced by e. ` The e is
` elided when |e starts
`
with consonant. The g at the end of g and of e together M
becomes v by L-nh .
In Q Zqb,
`
III/3 and I/1 are replaced by jQ and g, respectively.
` attached. The e at
e is ` the end is elided when |e starts with consonant.

Modification of g in hah[hm `
The formation of g is the same as for ` (present tense) in both ilfhj and iRfh
|ePLs.

58
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

^ nt\e\R ` ^ to be (1P) in hah[hm ` (Potential Mood) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk `
^aZl III/1 ^aZl\R ` III/2 ^aZe M III/3

(3rd person) May he be May those two be May they be

M
RRqNk ^aZ II/1
^aZlR ` II/2
^aZl II/3

(2nd person) May you be May you two be May you all be

M
tRqNk ^aZeR ` I/1 ^aZa I/2
^aZR I/3

(1st person) May I be May we two be May we be

L s Ll `
LR (1P) to go `
LZl (May one go), LZl\R, ` LZe M ...
q p\e\ a\hd q ` (1P) to study `
qZ l (May one study), qZ l\R, ` qZ e M ...
hw |ZZ `
w (1P) to see qeZl, ` qeZl\R, ` qeZe M ...
s hdc\e\R ` s (1P) to remember jZl, ` jZl\R, ` jZe M ...
hdc\e\R ` (1P) to contemplate \eZl, ` \eZl\R, ` \eZe M ...
w gbwfQ Z `
Qw (4P) to perish QeZl, ` QeZl\R, ` QeZe M ...
ns} hanL `
ns} (6P) to create ns}lZ , ` ns}lZ \R, ` ns}eZ M ...

` be (2P) in hah[hm ` (Potential Mood) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

M gn to
gn M ^ha

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk `
\l III/1 \l\R ` III/2 M III/3

(3rd person) May he be May those two be May they be

M
RRqNk \ II/1
\lR ` II/2
\l II/3

(2nd person) May you be May you two be May you all be

M
tRqNk \R ` I/1 \a I/2
\R I/3

(1st person) May I be May we two be May we be

59
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

q \ `
q (5P) M , ` e\l\R
to pervade e\l M , ` eM M ..
\ gaoP[Q Z \ (9P) to know }\Q e\l, ` }\Q e\l\R, ` }\Q e M ,
`
Mis ijZ is (8U) to do iMe\fl, ` iMe\fl\R, ` iMe Mf , iMe\f , iMe\flR, ` iMe\fl, iMe\fR, ` iMe\fa, iMe\fR
` M ajQ, ` iMa\ , iMae\\R, ` iMaR, ` iMae, iMaahz, iMaRhz
/iMal, iMae\l\R i
asl M alfQ Z `
asl (1A) to be all, ale\l\R, ` aljQ, ` al\ , ale\\R, ` alR, ` ale, alahz, alRhz
`
M^ k \^Z `
^ (1A) to obtain ^Zl, ^Ze\l\R, ` ^ZjQ, ` ^Z\ , ^Ze\\R, ` ^ZjQ, ` ^Ze, ^Zahz, ^ZRhz
jR M \e\R ` jR (1A)
` to rejoice `
jRZl, jRZe\l\R, ` jRZjQ ...
RbM zk RbM ` (1A) to rejoice `
RPbZl, RPbZe\l\R, ` RPbZjQ
}Q |\^\fa Z `
}Q (4A) to be born `
}\eZl, }\eZe\l\R, ` }\eZjQ
RQ \Q Z `
RQ (4A) `
to consider RZl, RZe\l\R, ` RZjQ ...

hah[hm ` (Potential mood) iRfh |ePL (Passive Voice)

L s Ll `
LR (1P) to go LZl (May it be reached), LZe\l\R, ` LZjQ, `
LZ\ , LZe\\R, ` LZR, ` LZe, LZahz, LZRhz
hw |ZZ `
w (1P) to see `
eZl, eZe\l\R, ` eZjQ ...
`
M^ k \^Z `
^ (1A) to obtain `
OZl, OZe\l\R, ` OZjQ

Assignment on Conjugation in hah[hm `

Observe the elements in the forms and try to conjugate the above [\lsM for yourself.
Do the hah[hm ` portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.

60
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

7. w hfm ` (Benedictive Mood)

w hfm ` (Benedictive Mood) is used to express a wish or blessing.

Modification of hlm-` |es in w hfm `

hlm-` |es modified for w hfm `

qj qb [parasmaipada] Q Zqb [tmanepada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person e\l ` e\\R ` e\n M n n e\\R ` n jQ `

2nd person e\ e\R ` e\ n \ n e\\R ` n R `
1st person e\nR ` e\ e\ ne n ahz n Rhz

`
The standard |es for hml are used as a basis.
In qj qb,
III/3 becomes n. `
e\ is attached before the |es.
In Q Zqb,
`
III/3 and I/1 are replaced by jQ and g, respectively.
` attached before l and
n is ` ` |es
of
` attached. The e at
n e is ` the end is elided when the |e starts with a consonant.

Modification of g in w hfm `
M does not take place in qj qb. In QqZ b, L
L M takes place if applicable.

61
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

` be (2P) in w hfm ` (Benedictive Mood) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

^ to be (1P) and gn to
`
* gn declines in the same manner as ^ in w hfm.`

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk `
^e\l III/1 ^e\\R ` III/2 ^e\n M III/3

(3rd person) May he be May those two be May they be

M
RRqNk ^e\ II/1
^e\R ` II/2 ^e\ II/3

(2nd person) May you be May you two be May you all be

M
tRqNk ^e\nR ` I/1 ^e\ I/2
^e\ I/3

(1st person) May I be May we two be May we be

L s Ll `
LR (1P) to go `
L\l (May one reach), L\\R, ` L\n M ...
v[ asu `
v[ (1A) to grow vh[k , vh[k e\\R, ` vh[k jQ, `
vh[k \ , vh[k e\\R, ` vh[k R, ` vh[k e, vh[k ahz, vh[k Rhz

Assignment on Conjugation in w hfm `

Do the w hfm ` portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.

62
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

8. m ` (General Past Tense)

m ` (General Past Tense) is used to express an action in the general past.

Modification of hlm-` |es in m `

hlm-` |es modified for m `
`
The standard |es for hml are used.

qj qb [parasmaipada] Q Zqb [tmanepada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person l` l\R ` gQ/n ` l l\R ` gc

2nd person : lR ` l \ \R ` R `
1st person gR ` a R ahz Rhz

`
The standard |es for hml are used as a basis.
To these standard forms, there are many changes according to [\l.M This is well
explained through P=ini-stras.

Modification of g in m `
According to [\l,M extra suffix n, ` n, or g is added.
Like for m,` an augment g/ is added before the g.

` be (2P) in m ` (General Past Tense) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

^ to be (1P) and gn to
`
* gn declines in the same manner as ^ in m.`

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk g^l ` III/1 g^l\R ` III/2 g^aQ ` III/3
(3rd person) He was Those two were They all were

M
RRqNk g^ II/1
g^lR ` II/2
g^l II/3

(2nd person) You were You two were You all were

M
tRqNk g^aR ` I/1 g^a I/2
g^R I/3

(1st person) I was We two were We all were

63
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

ab p\e\ a\hd ab ` (1P) to say, to tell `

ga\b l (He `
said), a\hb\R,a\hbk M,

ga\b , ga\hbR, ` ga\hb, ga\hbkR, ` ga\hb , ga\hb

b q b `
b q (4A) to shine gb hq/gb hq, gb hqk\l\R, ` gb hqkl,
gb hq\ , gb hqk\\R, ` gb hq R, ` gb hqhk, gb hq hz, gb hq hz

Assignment on Conjugation in m `
Do the m ` portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.

64
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

9. sm ` (Conditional Mood)

sm ` (Conditional Mood) is used to express a condition. hlmcs in sm ` are rarely seen.

Modification of hlm-` |es in sm `

hlm-` |es modified for sm `

qj qb [parasmaipada] Q Zqb [tmanepada]

Singular Dual Plural Singular Dual Plural

3rd person l ` l\R ` Q ` l Zl\R ` c

2nd person lR ` l \ Z\R ` R `
1st person R ` \a \R Z \ahz \Rhz

`
The standard |es for hml are used as a basis.
, an additional suffix to the [\l,M is attached to hlm-` |es in this chart.

Modification of g in sm `
is added to [\l.M If the [\l M is marked S in [\li
M Pw , is added before . In this

case, becomes _, together resulting in _.

M takes place if applicable.
L
Like for m,` an augment g/ is added before the g.

` be (2P) in sm ` (Conditional Mood) ilfhj |ePL (Active Voice)

^ to be (1P) and gn to
`
* gn declines in the same manner as ^ in sm.`

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

M
qNk (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

M
|RqNk g^ha_l ` III/1 g^ha_l\R ` III/2 g^ha_Q ` III/3
(3rd person) He could be Those two could be They all could be

M
RRqNk g^ha_ II/1
g^ha_lR ` II/2
g^ha_l II/3

(2nd person) You could be You two could be You all could be

M
tRqNk g^ha_R ` I/1 g^ha_\a I/2
g^ha_\R I/3

(1st person) I could be We two could be We all could be

65
 Topic VI Conjugation in other i\js

`
Mis ijZ `
is (8U) to do gihj_l (He `
could have done), gihj_l\R, ` gihj_Q
/gihj_l, gihj_Zl\R, ` gihj_c,
gihj_\ , gihj_Z\R, ` gihj_R, ` gihj_Z, gihj_\ahz, gihj_\Rhz

Assignment on Conjugation in sm `
Do the sm ` portion of Exercise #7 in the last part of this book.

66
 M
Topic VII The Concept of Nouns (nocR `
[subantam])

Topic VII

The Concept of
M
Nouns (nocR `
[subantam])

M
1. What is noun (nocR `
[subantam])?

As seen so far, there are only two types of words in Sanskrit language: verb (hlmc
qbR),` that which ends (gc) with verbal suffix (hlm)` , and noun (noc
M qbR),` that which ends
with nominal suffix (nqM ).`
In a sentence in Sanskrit, there has to be one verb, either written or implied. All
other words are nouns. All these nouns are connected to the verb, either directly or
indirectly.
A noun conveys a thing or person and how it is connected to the verb in the
sentence.

M
2. Constituents of noun (nocR `
[subantam])

M
The literal meaning of nocR ` that which ends with nqM [sup].
is `
` a type of |e (suffix), which can be called nominal suffix.
nqM is
M
nocR `
consists of two elements:

M
Noun (nocR `
[subantam])
`
= Nominal base (|\hlqhbiR [prtipadikam]) `
+ Nominal suffix (nqM -|e [sup-pratyaya7])

`
A |\hlqhbiR [prtipadikam] `
indicates a thing or a person. nqM -|e [sup-pratyaya7]
indicates how that thing or person is connected to the verb in a sentence.

67
 M
Topic VII The Concept of Nouns (nocR `
[subantam])

`
By suffixing different nominal suffixes (nqM -|es) to a |\hlqhbiR, ` according to the
M
relationship to the verb and the number, different forms of nouns (nocs) are produced.
This is what we call declension of noun.
Observe how a noun is declined from a single |\hlqhbi into twenty-one different
forms by suffixing twenty-one different suffixes according to seven types of cases and
three numbers.

|\hlqhbiR ` `
nqM |e (nominal suffixes) M
nocR `
(nouns)
(nominal base)
Num. Sing Plu- Num. Sing-
Case Dual Case Dual Plural
-ular ral ular
1st case nM }n ` 1st case j\R j\R j\R\
j\R
+ 2nd case gR ` ` wn ` = 2nd case j\RR ` j\R j\R\Q `
[rma]
3rd case \ O\R ` h^n ` 3rd case j\RZ j\R\O\R ` j\R
4th case mZ O\R ` On ` 4th case j\R\e j\R\O\R ` j\RZO
5th case mhn O\R ` On ` 5th case j\R\l ` j\R\O\R ` j\RZO
6th case mn ` n ` R ` 6th case j\R j\ReP j\R\\R `
7th case hm n ` nqM ` 7th case j\RZ j\ReP j\RZk M

`
That which immediately precedes the suffix is called g [aga]. So, when a nqM -|e
[sup-pratyaya] is suffixed to a |\hlqhbi, the |\hlqhbi is given the status of g. It is the g
`
which then undergoes any necessary modifications based on the nqM -|e. `
nqM -|es also
undergo some changes based on gender and ending-letter of the |\hlqhbi.

j\R This is original |\hlqhbi by itself.

(|\hlqhbiR)`
j\R + mZ `
A nqM -|e is suffixed. Then |\hlqhbi gains the status of g.
(gR)` (|e )
j\R + e `
nqM -|e is modified according to gender and ending of |\hlqhbi.
j\R\ + e `
g is modified according to nqM -|e.

68
 M
Topic VII The Concept of Nouns (nocR `
[subantam])

3. Classification of |\hlqhbi [prtipadika]

|\hlqhbis are classified in two ways:

i. Gender (masculine, feminine, and neuter)
ii. Ending letter of |\hlqhbi

This two-fold classification is the factor which makes the difference in declension
among different |\hlqhbis.

i. Genders

In Sanskrit language, there are three genders for nouns.

1. Masculine (q- M h [pu-liga7])
2. Feminine ( -h [str-liga7])
M i-h [napusaka-liga7])
3. Neuter (Qqn

Every |\hlqhbi has one of the genders in two ways:

A. Some |\hlqhbis intrinsically have their own gender.
B. Some |\hlqhbis are adjective/qualifier. Then the gender of the qualified is
given to the |\hlqhbi.

A. |\hlqhbis which have genders intrinsically.

Gender is just given to a |\hlqhbi in the language.
E.g., as (tree) is a masculine |\hlqhbi.
E.g., R\\ (garland) is a feminine |\hlqhbi.
E.g., (fruit) is a neuter |\hlqhbi.
E.g., bZz (body) is a masculine |\hlqhbi.
E.g., lQ (body) is a feminine |\hlqhbi.
E.g., wj j (body) is a neuter |\hlqhbi.
The gender of |\hlqhbi and the actual gender of the meaning of the |\hlqhbi do not
have to match.
E.g., b\j (wife) is a masculine |\hlqhbi.

69
 M
Topic VII The Concept of Nouns (nocR `
[subantam])

E.g., bZal\ (deity) is a feminine |\hlqhbi.

Gender can be decided by how the |\hlqhbi was derived.
E.g., \Q, b\Q, n\[Q, ij are neuter |\hlqhbis.
E.g., l , RRM
M
M , aj\ e, are neuter |\hlqhbis.

E.g., whp, |is hl, RhM p, ^hp are feminine |\hlqhbis.

One |\hlqhbi can have more than one gender.
E.g., k M (arrow) is a masculine and feminine |\hlqhbi.
One |\hlqhbi can have more than one meaning, and according to the meaning, the
gender may differ.
E.g., hR in the sense of friend is a neuter |\hlqhbi.
E.g., hR in the sense of the Sun God is a masculine |\hlqhbi.

B. |\hlqhbis which do not have gender of their own

Gender is given to a |\hlqhbi by another word which is qualified by the |\hlqhbi.
E.g., When b f (tall) is qualifying as (tree, masculine), it is used as masculine.
b f as (a tall tree)
M (white) is qualifying R\\ (garland, feminine), it is used as
E.g., When w
feminine.9
M \ R\\ (a white garland)
w
E.g., When qhll (fallen) is qualifying (fruit, neuter), it is used as neuter.
` fruit is fallen.)
qhllR (a

ii. Ending letters

Ending letter is as important as gender in terms of how |\hlqhbi declines.

For some |\hlqhbis, the manner of declension is not only influenced by the last letter,
but also by the last two letters, or how the word was derived.

9
If applicable, a feminine suffix ( |e ) such as or is suffixed.

70
 M
Topic VII The Concept of Nouns (nocR `
[subantam])

Distinguishing |\hlqhbi by gender and ending letter

Conventionally, letters in Sanskrit are named by adding i\j at the end.

E.g., g is called gi\j. is called i\j.
` called Qi\j. (g is added after the consonant, before
` called ni\j. Q is
E.g., n is
i\j, for the purpose of pronunciation.)
|\hlqhbis are given conventional names according to the two ways of classification
(gender and ending letter).
E.g., j\R is g-ending masculine |\hlqhbi (gi\j-gc-qh M -|\hlqhbiR).`
E.g., R\\ is -ending feminine |\hlqhbi (i\j-gc- h-|\hlqhbiR).`
` d-ending
E.g., a\d is ` feminine |\hlqhbi (di\j-gc- h-|\hlqhbiR).`
` n-ending
E.g., RQn is ` M ih-|\hlqhbiR).`
neuter |\hlqhbi (ni\j-gc-Qqn
Some |\hlqhbis have to be identified by the last few letters because of differences in
declension.
` gQ-ending
E.g., Q is ` `
masculine |\hlqhbi (gQ-gc-q h M -|\hlqhbiR).`
` Q-ending
E.g., ePhLQ is ` `
masculine |\hlqhbi (Q-gc-q h M -|\hlqhbiR).`
Some |\hlqhbis have to be identified by how the |\hlqhbis are derived because of
differences in declension.
` Rlq M -suffix-ending
E.g., ^Lal is ` masculine |\hlqhbi (Rl- M gc-qh M -|\hlqhbiR).`
` wls- suffix-ending masculine |\hlqhbi (wls- gc-qh M -|\hlqhbiR).`
E.g., qdl is

More basic categorization of |\hlqhbis is:

Vowel-ending (g}c [ajanta]) 10, that which ends (gc) with vowel (gd)`
Consonant-ending (zc [halanta]), that which ends (gc) with consonant (z)`

10
Refer R\zZjn\h in Volume 2 for gd, ` abbreviation of vowels. Also, refer P=ini-stra 8.2.39 in
` gd changes
z-nh in Volume 2 for how d of ` ` g}c.
into } in

71
 M
Topic VII The Concept of Nouns (nocR `
[subantam])

`
4. Nominal suffix (nqM -|e [sup-pratyaya7])

`
nqM -|ees indicate two things.
i. Case (ha^hp [vibhakti7])
There are seven cases (ha^hps) from 1st to 7th, whose meanings (ha^hp-g\f )
will be studied in the next topic.
`
ii. Number (adQR [vacanam])
There are three numbers (adQs): singular (vi-adQR),` dual (h-adQR),` and
plural (o-adQR).`

`
By these two factors (case and number), every suffix of twenty-one nqM -|es is
unique, as seen in the chart below.

Number
Singular Dual Plural
Case
1st case n M [su] [au] `
}n [jas]

2nd case `
gR [am] ` [au;] `
wn [as]

3rd case \ [;] `

O\R [bhym] `
h^n [bhis]

4th case mZ [e] `

O\R [bhym] `
On [bhyas]

5th case mhn [asi] `

O\R [bhym] `
On [bhyas]

6th case `
mn [as] `
n [os] `
R [m]

7th case hm [i] `

n [os] `
nqM [sup]

`
nqM -|es are suffixed to |\hlqhbi to convey:
i. The role which the |\hlqhbi plays in the sentence by case (ha^hp )
ii. The number of |\hlqhbi by number (adQR)`

72
 M
Topic VII The Concept of Nouns (nocR `
[subantam])

M
5. Objectives of learning nocR `

The objectives are to be able to:

1) Identify |\hlqhbi, ha^hp and adQ
M
The noc `
qbR will be marked in the format of:
M
nocR ` |\hlqhbiR +
= ` nqM (ha^hp
` / adQR)`
E.g., j\R\e = j\R (Rma) + 4th case/Singular
= j\R + 4/1
2) Determine the meaning of ha^hp (ha^hp-g)f and connect in the sentence.

` \ in the form of asking and answering

This can be done by fulfilling i\m

questions. This method is explained by the example below.

For example, in the sentence j\R n le\ nz q M \h qehl S

`
1) Locate the hlmcqb first and mark it. qehl w (1P) to see + /ilfhj/III/1
1/1
M
2) Mark all the nocqbs - j\R n le\ 3/1 nz 0 q M \h 2/3 qehl III/1 S

3) Ask questions to find out i\ji and non-i\ji by asking questions and finding ha^hp-g f

M
of the nocqbs.
1/1
Q: Who sees? (i qehl?) Look for 1st case since the hlmc is in ilfhj |ePL .
1/1
A: j\R qehl Of the word j\R , |\hlqhbi is j\R, which is gi\j\c-qh M w{ in ilfhj |R\
to qehl, in singular (1/1).

Q: What does he see? (i\hQ 2/3 qehl?) Look for 2nd case since in ilfhj |ePL undenoted
iRf is told in 2nd case.
A: q M \h 2/3 qehl Of the word q M \h, |\hlqhbi is q M , which is gi\j\c-Qqn
M ihw{ , in
iRfh hl e\ to qehl, in plural (2/3)

Q: With whom does he see? (ie\ 3/1 nz qehl?) Look for 3rd case since a word
connected to nz (together) is told in 3rd case.
A: n le\ 3/1 nz 0 qehl Of the word n le\, |\hlqhbi is n l\, which is i\j\c- hw{ ,
`
in nz lsl e\ in singular (3/1); nz is geR (0).

73
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

Topic VIII
Meanings of case endings
(ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

This section will be well comprehended when studied along with the next topics on
declension.

Basic concepts of ha^hp [vibhakti7] (case ending)

`
In Sanskrit language, every noun ends with a nominal suffix (nqM -|e [sup-
pratyaya7]).
`
Nominal suffixes (nqM -|es) are twenty-one in number and they are divided into
seven cases (ha^hps [vibhakti]s) and three numbers, as seen in the chart below.
`
ha^hp literally means division. The nqM -|es are divided into seven, and each
division is called |R\ ha^hp (1st division), hl e\ ha^hp (2nd division), and so on.

`
ha^hp (Division) of nqM -|es (nominal suffixes)

Number
Singular Dual Plural
ha^hp (division)
|R\ [pratham] (1st) nM }n `

hl e\ [dvity] (2nd) gR ` ` wn `

lsl e\ [t6ty] (3rd) \ O\R ` h^n `

dlM [caturth] (4th) mZ O\R ` On `

qrR [pacam] (5th) mhn O\R ` On `

k [:a:;h] (6th) mn ` n ` R `

nR [saptam] (7th) hm n ` nqM `

74
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

Each ha^hp conveys different meanings. The meaning (g f [artha]) of ha^hp is called
ha^ f [vibhaktyartha]. This ha^ f is added to |\hlqhbi to express the role of |\hlqhbi
played in the sentence.

The seven ha^hps are employed to convey two things:

A. i\ji (factors of action)

When a ha^hp is conveying i\ji [kraka], it is called i\ji-ha^hp .

Refer back to the topic of i\ji, if necessary.

B. Things other than i\ji (non-i\ji)

When a ha^hp is conveying things other than i\ji, it is called non-i\ji-ha^hp .

ha^hps are called by different names as seen in the chart below. To avoid the
possible confusion caused by mixing up i\ji and ha^hp, in this book we refer to the ha^hp
by the numerical names (1, |R\, or 1st case) rather than the other names (nominative, etc.),
which are also associated with i\ji.

Different names for ha^hps

ha^hp Case English term

|R\ ha^hp 1st case Nominative

hl e\ ha^hp 2nd case Accusative

lsl e\ ha^hp 3rd case Instrumental

dlM ha^hp 4th case Dative

qrR ha^hp 5th case Ablative

k ha^hp 6th case Genitive

nR ha^hp 7th case Locative

75
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

1. |R\ ha^hp (First Case)

1st case is employed to express:

A. i\ji-ha^hp

il\f (agent) of a hlmc (verb) in ilfhj |ePL (active voice)

The 1st case which is in the sense of il\f is called ilfhj |R\ [kartari pratham]
1/1
E.g., bZabt qehl III/1 S (Devadatta sees.)

The verb is in ilfhj |ePL (active voice).

With reference to the action of the verb, bZabt is il\f.
Thus bZabt is in the 1st case.

iRf (object) in iRfh |ePL (passive voice)

The 1st case which is in the sense of iRf is called iRfh |R\ [karma=i pratham]
1/3
E.g., L}\ ecZ III/3 S (The elephants are seen.)

The verb is in iRfh |ePL (passive voice).

With reference to the action of the verb, L} is iRf.
Thus L} is in the 1st case.

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp

`
Address to get the attention of the listener (nP[QR [sambodhanam])

` q\hz II/1 S (Oh Rma! protect me.)

E.g., zZ 0 j\R S/1 R\R 2/1
E.g., zZ 0 bZa\ S/3
` q\l II/3 S (Oh Devas! protect me.)
R\R 2/1
Even though there are only seven ha^hps and nP[Q is a type of 1st case, the
letter S is utilized for indicating nP[Q in this book. This is because for some
words the singular form of nP[Q is different from the general 1st case singular
1/1
form. E.g., j\R , j\R S/1.

76
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

2. hl e\ ha^hp (Second Case)

2nd case is employed to express:

A. i\ji-ha^hp

iRf (object) in ilfhj |ePL (active voice)

The 2nd case which is in the sense of iRf is called iRfh hl e\ [karma=i dvity]

E.g., bZabt 1/1 ` qehl III/1 S (Devadatta sees elephants.)

L}\Q 2/3

The verb is in ilfhj |ePL (active voice).

With reference to the action of the verb, L} is iRf.
Thus L} is in the 2nd case.

A destination of a going or moving action is also considered to be a iRf (object).

4th case is also taken optionally.

E.g., bZabt 1/1

` / or y\R\e 4/1 Lhl III/1 S (Devadatta goes to village.)
y\RR 2/1

y\R is iRf of the hlmc, therefore it is in the 2nd or 4th case.

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp

A word connected to the following words: (These words govern the 2nd case.)

o |hl (indeclinable, towards)

` |hl 0 \ 1/1 ^ahl III/1 S (There is a desire towards liberation.)

E.g., RPR 2/1

o gQ M (indeclinable, in keeping with, following)

` gQ M 0 n
E.g., qbZwR 2/1 1/1 ` oP[hl III/1 S
aZb\Q 2/3

(He understands the Vedas in keeping with the teaching.)

o gcjZ (indeclinable, without)

E.g., qR ` gcjZ 0 bZabt

M 2/1 1/1
Q 0 l_
M hl III/1 S

(Without the son, Devadatta is not happy.)

77
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

3. lsl e\ ha^hp (Third Case)

3rd case is employed to convey:

A. i\ji-ha^hp
`
ijR (instrument)

` called ijZ lsl e\ [kara=e t6ty]

The 3rd case which is in the sense of ijR is

E.g., 1) bZabt 1/1

` \bhl III/1 S (Devadatta eats the rice by hand.)
zZQ 3/1 bQR 2/1
1/1
E.g., 2) bQ zZQ 3/1 \xlZ III/1 S (The rice is eaten by hand.)
z, a means to accomplish the action, is ijR, ` therefore it is in the 3rd case.

il\f (agent) in iRfh |ePL (passive voice)

The 3rd case which is in the sense of il\f is called ilfhj lsl e\ [kartari t6ty]
1/1
E.g., 3) bQ bZabtZQ 3/1 zZQ 3/1 \xlZ III/1 S (The rice is eaten by Devadatta by hand.)

bZabt is il\f of the hlmc, therefore it is in the 3rd case.

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp
zZl M (cause) of an action
The 3rd case which is in the sense of zZl M is called zZl lsl e\ [hetau t6ty]

M Q 3/1 RQ_R
E.g., 1) qeZ M ` ^lZ
2/1 III/1
S (One gains human birth because of pu=ya.)
M is zZl,M therefore it is in the 3rd case.
qe

An indication through which a given thing is known

The 3rd case in the sense of the indication is called ^
l Z lsl e\ [itthabhte t6ty]
1/1 3/3 3/3 III/1
E.g., 1) j na q gaLlZ S
(vara is understood in the form of everything.)
` qZ 3/1 hlhl
E.g., 2) vll 1/1 III/1
S
(This remains in its own form.)

A word connected to nz (indeclinable, with) which governs 3rd case

The 3rd case used for a word connected to nz is called nz-lsl e\ [saha-t6ty]

E.g., ZQ 3/1 nz 0 j\R 1/1

Lhl III/1 S (Rma goes with Lak:ma=a.)

78
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

M ha^hp (Fourth Case)

4. dl

4th case is employed to convey:

A. i\ji-ha^hp

`
nb\QR (recipient of action of giving, etc.)

` called nb\Q Z dl
The 4th case which is in the sense of nb\QR is M [sampradne caturth]

E.g., 1) bZabt 1/1

` bb\hl III/1 S (Devadatta gives money to a priest.)
h}\e 4/1 [QR 2/1

h}, the recipient of action, is nb\QR, ` therefore it is in the 4th case.

E.g., 2) d\ef 1/1

hw_ZO 4/3
` qhbwhl III/1 S
w\R 2/1

(Teacher teaches the scripture to the disciples.)

hw_, to whom the agent wants to connect by the action, is nb\QR, ` thus it is in
the 4th case.

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp

Purpose of action.

M
E.g., 1) qe\e 4/1 ` e}lZ
bZa\Q 2/3 III/1
S (One worships devas to gain puya.)

A word connected to the following words which govern 4th case.

o QR (indeclinable, salutation)
E.g., hwa\e 4/1 QR 0
S (Salutation to iva.)
o h (indeclinable, welfare)
E.g., h 0 }QO
Z 4/3
S (May there be welfare for the people.)
o \z\ (indeclinable, an exclamation used in making oblations to the gods)
E.g., \e 4/1 \z\ 0 S (This oblation is to Indra.)
o Etc.

79
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

5. qrR ha^hp (Fifth Case)

5th case is employed to convey:

A. i\ji-ha^hp

`
gq\b\QR (origin, etc.)

` called gq\b\Q Z qrR [apdne pacam]

The 5th case which is in the sense of gq\b\QR is

` as\l 5/1
E.g., 1) R 1/1 ` qlhl III/1 S (The fruit falls from the tree.)

as, origin of action, is gq\b\QR, ` therefore it is in the 5th case.

E.g., 2) bZabt 1/1

` ho^Zhl III/1 S (Devadatta is afraid of the tiger.)
\ \l 5/1

\ , source of fear, is gq\b\QR, ` therefore it is in the 5th case.

E.g., 3) j 1/1
\l 5/1 ` jhl III/1 S (vara protects people from sorrow.)
` Qj\Q 2/3

, from which one is protected, is gq\b\QR, ` therefore it is in the 5th case.

` iRR 1/1
E.g., 4) }\l 5/1 ` }\elZ III/1 S (Lotus is born of water.)

}, cause of birth, is gq\b\QR, ` therefore it is in the 5th case.

` \ijR 2/1
E.g., 5) q\\e\l 5/1 ` g[ lZ III/1 S (He studies grammar from the teacher.)

q\\e, a teacher of formal learning, is gq\b\QR, ` therefore it is in the 5th case.

80
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp

zZl M (cause) of an action [zZl qrR ]

The 5th case which is in the sense of zZl M is called zZl qrR [hetau pacam]
E.g., 1) qafl 1/1 ` hl 0 [R\l 5/1
ah R\Q 1/1 ` \elZ III/1 S
(The mountain has fire. is known beucase of smoke.)

A thing or person from which another thing or person is distinguished.

The 5th case used for such word is called ha^pZ qrR [vibhakte pacam]

` nR 1/1
E.g., 1) RQ\l 5/1 ` hahw_lZ III/1 S (Speaking truth is greater than silence.)

A referential point for words of direction in time and space. (hb!{s)

The 5th case used for a word connected to hb!{ is called hb ePLZ qrR [digyoge pacam]
o qa f (before, east)
` qa f
E.g., \Q\l 5/1 1/1
nn\j 1/1
S (Before the knowledge, there is nn\j.)
o qj (after, superior)
` qj
E.g., \Q\l 5/1 1/1
RP 1/1
S (After the knowledge, there is RP.)
o tj (after, above, north)
` ^\L\l 5/1
E.g., vl\l 5/1 ` tj 1/1
^\L 1/1
gh III/1 S
(After this section, there is a section.)
o |\i ` (indeclinable, before)
` |\i ` 0 g\QR 1/1
E.g., \Q\l 5/1 ` n l III/1
` S
(Before the knowledge there was ignorance.)
o gQcjR (` indeclinable, after)
` gQcj 0 Rhj 2/1 Lhl III/1 S
E.g., "\Q\l 5/1
(After bathing he goes to the temple.)

81
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

A word connected to the following words, which govern 5th case.

o g (pronoun, another, other)

` g
E.g., is \l 5/1 1/1
nR f 1/1
Q 0 gh III/1 S (Nobody is capable other than is .)
o lj (pronoun, the other)
` lj
E.g., bh\l 5/1 1/1
a\R 1/1
S (Left (hand) is the other than right (hand).)
o h^- (adjective, different)
` vk
E.g., l\l 5/1 1/1
h^- 1/1
^ahl III/1 S (This is different from that.)
o lZ (indeclinable, without)
` lZ 0 ha 1/1 Q 0 alfl Z III/1 S (Without j, there is no world.)
E.g., j\l 5/1

A word connected to the following words which govern 2nd, 3rd and 5th case.

o qsi ` (indeclinable, without, apart from)

` qsi ` 0 is
E.g., j\R 2/1/ j\RZ 3/1/ j\R\l 5/1 1/1
QLj 2/1 Lhl III/1 S
(Without j\R is goes to the city.)
o haQ\ (indeclinable, without, except)
` haQ\ 0 n
E.g., \Q 2/1/ \QQZ 3/1/ \Q\l 5/1 M 1/1 Q 0 ^ahl III/1 S

(Without knowledge there is no happiness.)

82
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

6. k ha^hp (Sixth Case)

6th case is employed to convey:

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp

n (connection, relationship) of a noun with another noun

The 6th case used in the sense of connection is called nZ k [sambandhe :a:;h]

o In a phrase such as A of B or A for B, the B takes 6th case.

` S (The house of bZabt)
E.g., bZabt 6/1 LszR 1/1
` nR
E.g., ^p\Q\R 6/3 ` S (Happiness for the devotees)
M 1/1

o In a sentence such as A has B, the A takes 6th case.

E.g., bZabt 6/1 qiR
M ` gh III/1S (Devadatta has a book.)
1/1

o An abstract noun is often connected to 6th case ending word.

o Literally translated, A has the status of B. Simply translated, A is B.
` S
E.g., bZabt 6/1 gh[i\hjR 1/1
= bZabt has the status of a qualified person.
1/1 1/1
= bZabt is a qualified person. (bZabt gh[i\j S)

` S (Because of the absence of a pot)

E.g., 6/1 g^\a\l 5/1
= has the absence.
1/1
= is absent. = is not there. ( Q 0 gh III/1S)

A group from which a selection (hQ[\fj) is made

The 6th case used for that group is called hQ[\fjZ k [nirdhra=e :a:;h]
Note that the selection belongs to the group. This is the difference from ha^pZ qrR .
6/2 1/1 1/1
E.g., j\ReP j\R Z S (Of j\R and , j\R is the elder.)
` #R 1/1
E.g., \Q\R 6/3 ` R[jlR
M 1/1
S (Among the fruits, mango is the sweetest.)

83
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

7. nR ha^hp (Seventh Case)

7th case is employed to convey:

A. i\ji-ha^hp

`
gh[ijR (locus of agent or object of action)

` called gh[ijZ nR [adhikara=e saptam]

The 7th case used in the sense of gh[ijR is
1/1
E.g., 1) bZabt Rz\QnZ 7/1 qdhl III/1 S (Devadatta cooks in the kitchen.)

Rz\Qn, locus of agent, is gh[ijR, ` therefore it is in the 7th case.

E.g., 2) bZabt 1/1

` qdhl III/1 S (Devadatta cooks rice in a vessel.)
q\Z 7/1 bQR 2/1

q\, locus of object, is gh[ijR, ` therefore it is in the 7th case.

1/1
E.g., 3) bZabt M 7/1 h"hl III/1 S (Devadatta feels affection in his son.)
qZ

M locus of interest or subject matter, is gh[ijR, ` therefore it is in the 7th case.

q,
When gh[ij is particularly locus of interest or subject matter, the 7th case is
conventionally called hake-nR [vi:aya-saptam].

84
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp

A word indicating an action

The 7th case used in such sense is called nhl nR [sati saptam]

M 7/1 nhl 7/1 bZabt

E.g., 1) when there is A, ~ qZ 1/1
LszZ 7/1 hlhl III/1 S
(When the son is there, Devadatta stays at home.)

E.g., 2) when A is A, ~ M 7/1 qZM 7/1 nhl 7/1 bZabt

qZ 1/1
lM 1/1
^ahl III/1 S
( When the son is nourished, Devadatta is happy.)

o These sentences can be paraphrased in eb\ (when) ~, lb\ (then) ~ structure.

E.g., 1) eb\ qM ^ahl lb\ bZabt LszZ hlhl S

E.g., 2) eb\ qM qM ^ahl lb\ bZabt lM ^ahl S

`
o nhl is a 7th case singular declension of nl (being).

o The gender and number agree with those of the noun.

In masculine
hakeZ 7/1 nhl 7/1 - when there is an object,
7/2 7/2
hakeeP nlP - when there are two objects,
hakeZk M 7/3 n M 7/3 - when there are three or more objects,

In neuter
i\jZ 7/1 nhl 7/1 - when there is a cause,
7/2 7/2
i\jeP nlP - when there are two causes,
i\jZk M 7/3 n M 7/3 - when there are three or more causes,

In feminine
`
w \e\ 7/1 n\R 7/1 - when there is a doubt,
7/2 7/2
w eP nP - when there are two doubts,
w \n M 7/3 nl k M 7/3 - when there are three or more doubts,

o The word nhl etc., may or may not be present in the sentence.

85
 Topic VIII Meanings of Case Endings (ha^\f [vibhaktyarth7])

8. Summary table of ha^\f

Case / ha^hp Meaning of the case / ha^\f
1st case A. i\ji-ha^hp
|R\ ha^hp ilfhj (agent) |R\ in active voice (ilfhj |ePLZ)
iRfh (object) |R\ in passive voice (iRfh |ePLZ)
B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp
nP[QR `
2nd case A. i\ji-ha^hp
hl e\ ha^hp iRfh (object) hl e\ in active voice (ilfhj |ePLZ)
B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp
|hl, gQ,M gcjZ, etc.
rd
3 case A. i\ji-ha^hp
lsl e\ ha^hp ilfhj (agent) lsl e\ in passive voice (iRfh |ePLZ)
ijZ (instrument) lsl e\
B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp
zZl (reason) lsl e\
l Z (in the form of ~) lsl e\
^
nz (with) lsl e\
4th case A. i\ji-ha^hp
dlM ha^hp nb\Q Z (recipient) dlM
B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp
QR , h, \z\, etc.
5th case A. i\ji-ha^hp
qrR ha^hp gq\b\Q Z (origin) qrR
B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp
zZl qrR
ha^pZ qrR
hb ePLZ qrR
g, lj, h^-, lZ, etc.
qsi, haQ\, etc. (also take hl e\ and lsl e\)
th
6 case B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp
k ha^hp n-k
7th case A. i\ji-ha^hp
nR ha^hp gh[ijZ (locus) nR
B. Non-i\ji-ha^hp
nhl nR

86
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

Topic IX
Declension of
Vowel-ending Nominal bases
and Pronouns

Declension in Sanskrit is the making of different forms of nouns from one nominal
`
base (|\hlqhbi [prtipadika]) by adding different nominal suffixes (nqM -|es [sup-
pratyaya]s).

In this section, declensions of two types of |\hlqhbis are studied:

|\hlqhbis ending with vowel (g}c-|\hlqhbi [ajanta-prtipadika])
|\hlqhbis termed nafQ\R [sarvanma]
They are studied together because of the similarity in how they decline.

Pronouns (nafQ\R [sarvanma])

Among |\hlqhbis, thirty-five types of |\hlqhbis are grouped and called nafQ\R
[sarvanma] in Sanskrit grammatical terminology. nafQ\Rs are more or less equivalent to
pronouns because they can represent any thing or person which has been mentioned
before. nafQ\Rs are grouped separately because their grammatical treatment, such as
declension and further transformation, is different from other |\hlqhbis.
nafQ\Rs can be in three genders and they decline according to their genders.

How to study declensions

The objective of studying the declension of nouns is to be able to identify the
declined noun forms with their case and number quickly and accurately.

87
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

The conventional practice is to memorize the whole declension chart by chanting

the whole chart at once. However, it is more practical and efficient to associate each
declined form with case and number individually. For example, when a student looks at
the form j\R\\R,` to identify its case and number in conventional way, he has to chant
through almost the whole declension from the beginning, without losing count. Instead, it
is far better to be able to identify the form j\R\\R` as 6/3 by sight. For achieving that,
case and number are clearly written next to each declined form in this book.
The ways of declension differ by the gender and ending letter (or letters), and
sometimes other factors. Because of this, there are so many different paradigms (ways of
declension). However, there are some similarities and patterns among certain paradigms.
Thus, it is important to see the common features between paradigms, and study only the
differences. In order to see these points, in this book the order of |\hlqhbis is arranged as
follows:

g-ending masculine |\hlqhbis

g-ending nafQ\R |\hlqhbis in masculine (similar to the previous)
Other nafQ\R |\hlqhbis in masculine (similar to the previous)
g-ending neuter |\hlqhbis (similar to the g-ending masculine |\hlqhbis)
g-ending nafQ\R |\hlqhbis in neuter (similar to the previous)
Other nafQ\R |\hlqhbis in neuter (similar to the previous)
/-ending masculine |\hlqhbis (similar to each other)
`
-ending masculine |\hlqhbis (following original pattern of nqM -|e)
-ending feminine |\hlqhbis
-ending nafQ\R |\hlqhbis in feminine (similar to the previous)
Other nafQ\R |\hlqhbis in feminine (similar to the previous)
-ending feminine |\hlqhbis (similar to -ending feminine |\hlqhbis)
/-ending feminine |\hlqhbis (similar to -ending feminine and /-ending
masculine)
Other nafQ\R |\hlqhbis in all genders

88
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

1. g-ending in qh M (masculine) j\R [rma]

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR j\R (Rma), gi\j\c-qh M -w{
`
adQR (Number) `
viadQR (Singular) hadQR ` oadQR `
ha^hp (Case) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) j\R 1/1 j\R 1/2 j\R\ 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) j\RR ` 2/1 j\R 2/2 j\R\Q ` 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) j\RZ 3/1 j\R\O\R ` 3/2 j\R 3/3

dlM (4th case) j\R\e 4/1 j\R\O\R ` 4/2 j\RZO 4/3

qrR (5th case) j\R\l/j\R\b ` 5/1 j\R\O\R ` 5/2 j\RZO 5/3

k (6th case) j\R 6/1 j\ReP 6/2 j\R\\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) j\RZ 7/1 j\ReP 7/2 j\RZk M 7/3

`
nP[QR (Vocative) zZ j\R S/1 zZ j\R S/2 zZ j\R\ S/3

In 3/1 and 6/3, takes place when applicable. (Refer -nh (8.4.2) in
Volume 2.)
f - takes place. (Refer R[
In 7/3, R[ f -nh (8.3.59) in Volume 2.)

Other gi\j-gc-qh M (g-ending masculine) |\hlqhbis:

d\ef teacher bZa deva ^PL experience
j vara bZabt name of a person Pi sphere of experience
M quality, gu=a
L bZw country hake object
y\R village bZz body as tree
pot qM son aZb the Veda
d the Moon M person
qNk hw_ disciple
}Q people |\ pr=a n relationship
} a individual \ Brahmin ne f the Sun
\L renunciation ^Zb difference z hand

89
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

Assignment on g-ending masculine

1st case (|R\ ha^hp )

Observe the forms in the 1st case.

o In 1/1, hanLf is added at the end.
o In 1/2, the last letter g is replaced by .
o In 1/3, the last letter g is elongated and hanLf is added at the end.
In this manner, make forms in the 1st case with all the gi\j\cqh M -|\hlqhbis in the list.
Study the meanings of 1st case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.
Do Exercises #8 and #9 in the last part of this book.
Complete up to Topic IV - hanLfnh [visarga-sandhi7] section of Volume 2.
Apply hanLfnh to all the sentences in Exercise #8 and #9.

2nd case (hl e\ ha^hp )

M
Complete Topic VI Consonant Sandhi 7. gQ\j of Volume 2.
Observe the forms in the 2nd case.
` added at the end.
o In 2/1, R is
o 2/2 is always the same as 1/2 for any |\hlqhbi.
` added at the end.
o In 2/3, the last letter g is elongated and Q is
In this manner, make forms in the 2nd case with all the gi\j\cqh M -|\hlqhbis in the list.
Study the meanings of 2nd case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.
Do Exercise #10 in the last part of this book.

3rd case (lsl e\ ha^hp )

` Volume 2.
Complete Topic VI Consonant Sandhi 10. R of
Observe the forms in the 3rd case.
M
o In 3/1, Q is suffixed with L-nh . can happen for the suffix.
o In 3/2, the last letter g is elongated before the suffix O\R. `
o In 3/3, the last letter g is changed into and hanLf is added at the end.
In this manner, make forms in the 3rd case with all the gi\j\cqh M -|\hlqhbis in the list.
Study the meanings of 3rd case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.

90
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

Do Exercise #11 in the last part of this book.

4th case (dlM ha^hp )

Observe the forms in the 4th case.

o In 4/1, the last letter g is elongated and e is suffixed.
o 4/2 is always the same as 3/2 for any |\hlqhbi.
o In 4/3, the last letter g is replaced by v before the suffix O .
In this manner, make forms in the 4th case with all the gi\j\cqh M -|\hlqhbis in the list.
Study the meanings of 4th case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.
Do Exercise #12 in the last part of this book.

5th case (qrR ha^hp )

` Volume 2.
Complete Topic VI Consonant Sandhi 4. }R of
Observe the forms in the 5th case.
` b ` is added.
o In 5/1, the last letter g is elongated and l or
o 5/2 and 5/3 are always the same as 4/2 and 4/3 for any |\hlqhbi.
In this manner, make forms in the 5th case with all the gi\j\cqh M -|\hlqhbis in the list.
Study the meanings of 5th case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.
Do Exercise #13 in the last part of this book.

6th case (k ha^hp )

Observe the forms in the 6th case.

o In 6/1, is suffixed.
o In 6/2, eP is added at the end.
` suffixed. can happen for the
o In 6/3, the last letter g is elongated and Q\R is
suffix.
In this manner, make forms in the 6th case with all the gi\j\cqh M -|\hlqhbis in the list.
Study the meanings of 6th case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.
Do Exercise #14 in the last part of this book.

91
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

7th case (nR ha^hp )

` Volume 2.
f R of
Complete Topic VI Consonant Sandhi 9. R[
Observe the forms in the 7th case.
M
o In 7/1, the last letter g and the suffix become v by L-nh. (g + = v)
o 7/2 is always the same as 6/2 for any |\hlqhbi.
f R. `
o In 7/3, the last letter g is replaced by v and n M is suffixed, with R[
In this manner, make forms in the 7th case with all the gi\j\cqh M -|\hlqhbis in the list.
Study the meanings of 7th case in Topic VIII - Meanings of Case Endings.
Do Exercise #15 in the last part of this book.

M Pi, hake, as, and aZb.

Make the declension chart for |\hlqhbis: d\ef, bZa, qNk,
`
Study Topic XI Nouns in Apposition (nR\Q\h[ijR [samndhikara=am])
`
Study the first portion of Topic XII Indeclinables (geR [avyayam])

92
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

2. g-ending Pronouns in qh M (masculine) naf [sarva]

Among nafQ\Rs, g-ending |\hlqhbis in masculine decline like j\R, except for 1/3, 4/1,
5/1, 6/3, and 7/1, which are printed in bold in the chart.
M
o In 1/3, is suffixed with Lnh, resulting with v. It looks like the form in 7/1.
However, 7/1 in nafQ\R is different from j\R-w{. Thus there is no confusion.
o In 4/1, is suffixed.
` suffixed.
o In 5/1, \l is
` suffixed, instead of Q\R in
o In 6/3, the last letter g is replaced by v, and n\R is ` j\R. n `
`
of n\R becomes f . (Refer R[
R[ f -nh (8.3.59) in Volume 2.)
` suffixed.
o In 7/1, hQ is

When naf (all) is used in singular, it generally indicates the whole part of a thing,
1/1
while when naf (all) is used in plural, it generally indicates all the members. E.g., naf
1/1
as (the whole tree); na 1/3 as\ 1/3
(all the trees)

` (all), gi\j\c-nafQ\R-qh M -w{

Declension of |\hlqhbiR naf

adQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

`
viadQR (Singular)
ha^hp (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) naf na% na 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) nafR ` na% na\fQ `

lsl e\ (3rd case) na na\fO\R ` na

dlM (4th case) naf 4/1 na\fO\R ` naO

qrR (5th case) naf\l/naf\b ` 5/1 na\fO\R ` naO

k (6th case) naf nafeP nak\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) nafhQ ` 7/1 nafeP nak M

`
nP[QR (Vocative) zZ naf zZ na% zZ na S/3

The rest declines like j\R.

93
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

Other gi\j-gc-nafQ\R (g-ending pronouns):

g another ^ both (only in dual) qa f before, east
glj one of the two vi one, someone ha all
lj the other qj after, another oneself, ones own

Assignment on g-ending pronoun (nafQ\R) in masculine

Make declension charts for the gi\j\c-nafQ\R-|\hlqhbis listed above.

Do Exercise #16 in the last part of this book.

94
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

3. Other Pronouns in qh M (masculine) lb, eb, vlb, hiR `

`
nafQ\Rs lb ` (that), eb ` (that which), vlb ` (this), and hiR (kim) are used in the language
very often. The declensions of these words are very similar to g-ending pronouns, like naf,
because they decline just as g-ending |\hlqhbis: l, e, vl, and i, respectively. The
only exception is in 1/1 for lb ` and vlb.

nafQ\R-|\hlqhbi lb ` (that) represents a thing or person who is away from the speaker.
`
E.g., n LhR_hl S (He will come.); lZ abhc S (They say.); lhQ ^ha_\hR S (I will be there.), etc.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR lb ` (that) in masculine

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) n 1/1 l lZ

hl e\ (2nd case) lR ` l l\Q `
lsl e\ (3rd case) lZQ l\O\R ` l
dlM (4th case) l l\O\R ` lZO
qrR (5th case) l\l/l\b ` l\O\R ` lZO
k (6th case) l leP lZk\R `
nR (7th case) lhQ ` leP lZk M
The rest declines like naf. * There is no vocative.

The |\hlqhbi is modified from lb ` to l, g-ending, and declines like naf.

1/1 is the only exception.

95
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

eb ` is a relative pronoun. The corresponding pronoun is lb.

A sentence which includes the relative pronoun eb ` is called a relative clause, 11
which is subordinate to a main clause, which includes lb. In those clauses, a thing or
person indicated by eb ` is the same thing indicated by lb, which means eb ` corresponds to
lb.
1/1
For example, in the sentence e qehl III/1 n 1/1
}\Q\hl III/1 S (the one who sees,
1/1
he knows.), e qehl III/1 is a relative clause because it includes eb. n 1/1
}\Q\hl III/1 is
a main clause because it includes lb. Both eb ` and lb ` in these two clauses are indicating the
` qshn II/1 l\l 5/1
same person. Similarly, e\l 5/1 ` ab\hR I/1 (Because you ask, therefore, I
1/1
speak.) The cases do not have to match. e qhbwhl III/1 l 4/1 QR 0S (The one who
teaches, salutations to him.)
More will be understood by doing Exercise #17.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR eb ` (that which) in masculine

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) e e eZ

hl e\ (2nd case) eR ` e e\Q `
lsl e\ (3rd case) eZQ e\O\R ` e
dlM (4th case) e e\O\R ` eZO
qrR (5th case) e\l/e\b ` e\O\R ` eZO
k (6th case) e eeP eZk\R `
nR (7th case) ehQ ` eeP eZk M
The entire declension is like naf. * There is no vocative.
The |\hlqhbi is modified from eb ` to e, g-ending, and declines like naf.

11
A clause is a unit of words in which one verb is seen, or implied. A clause is a part of a sentence
and not a sentence by itself. A clause is incorporated into a sentence by utilizing a relative pronoun.
E.g., I found what I was looking for. I choose that which is proper.

96
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

vlb ` (this) represents a thing or person who is in close proximity to the speaker. E.g.,
1/1 1/1
vk M
qNk S (This person); vlZ 1/3 as\ 1/3
S (These trees), etc.
lb ` (that) and vlb ` (this) are often used together to show that which was discussed in
previous sentences is the same as this which is under discussion in the current sentence.
1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/1
E.g., vi |hnu Qsq Sn vk M
qNk S (There is a famous king. He is this man.)

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR vlb ` (this) in masculine

adQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

`
viadQR (Singular)
ha^hp (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) vk 1/1 vl vlZ

hl e\ (2nd case) vlR ` vl vl\Q `

lsl e\ (3rd case) vlZQ vl\O\R ` vl

dlM (4th case) vl vl\O\R ` vlZO

qrR (5th case) vl\l/vl\b ` vl\O\R ` vlZO

k (6th case) vl vleP vlZk\R `

nR (7th case) vlhQ ` vleP vlZk M

The rest declines like naf. * There is no vocative.

The |\hlqhbi is modified from vlb ` to vl, g-ending, and declines like naf.
1/1 is the only exception.
f (Ref. R[
v is added to the paradigm of lb, with R[ f -nh (8.3.59) in Volume 2)
1/1
on vk .

97
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

`
hiR (kim) is an interrogative pronoun.
E.g., i 1/1
vk 1/1
M
qNk 1/1
`
S (Who is this person?); iZ 1/3 lZ 1/3 S (Who are they?); iR 2/1
` S (Why?); i 6/1 qM
qehn II/1S (What do you see?); i\l 5/1 1/1
n 1/1
S (Whose son is he?);
iZ k M 7/3 bZwkZ M 7/3 elZ III/1 S (Where, in which places, is it seen?), etc.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR hiR` (what) in masculine

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) i i iZ

hl e\ (2nd case) iR ` i i\Q `
lsl e\ (3rd case) iZ Q i\O\R ` i
dlM (4th case) i i\O\R ` iZ O
qrR (5th case) i\l/i\b ` i\O\R ` iZ O
k (6th case) i ieP iZ k\R `
nR (7th case) ihQ ` ieP iZ k M
It declines like naf. * There is no vocative.
` i, g-ending, and declines like naf.
The |\hlqhbi is modified from hiR to

`
When eb ` and hiR.are used together, it means whatever.
E.g., eZ 1/3 iZ 1/3 }Q\ 1/3
` &PiR 2/1
vlR 2/1 ` qhc III/3 j 1/1 ` jhl III/1 S (Whoever
l\Q 2/3
people chant this verse, vara protect them.)

` masculine
Assignment on lb, eb, vlb, hiR in

Do Exercises #17 and #18 in the last part of this book.

Review hanLfnh section of Volume 2 for n and vk .

98
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

M ih (neuter) \Q [j=na]
4. g-ending in Qqn

g-ending neuter |\hlqhbis decline like j\R. The only difference is in the first two
cases, which are always identical for any neuter |\hlqhbis.

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR \Q M ih-w{
(knowledge), gi\j\c-Qqn
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) \QR ` 1/1 \Q Z 1/2 \Q\hQ 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) \QR ` 2/1 \Q Z 2/2 \Q\hQ 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) \Q ZQ \Q\O\R ` \Q

dlM (4th case) \Q\e \Q\O\R ` \Q ZO
qrR (5th case) \Q\l/\Q\b ` \Q\O\R ` \Q ZO
k (6th case) \Q \QeP \Q\Q\R `
nR (7th case) \Q Z \QeP \Q Zk M
nP[QR ` S/1 zZ \Q Z
zZ \Q S/2 zZ \Q\hQ S/3
(Vocative)
The rest declines like j\R in qh M .
In 1/3, 2/3, 3/1, and 6/3, takes place when applicable. (Ref. P=ini-stra 8.4.2)

M ih (g-ending neuter) |\hlqhbis:

Other gi\j-gc-Qqn
g- food d l consciousness q\ vessel aj\ e dispassion
gje forest } water M
qi book wj j body
he sense l truth |ij - section w\ scripture
iR lotus sorrow - fruit, result w character
ij instrument [Q wealth hR friend n\[Q means
i\j cause QLj town aQ forest M happiness
n
i\ef effect QZ eye a cloth be heart
Z field q leaf a\ - sentence
Assignment on g-ending neuter
M i-|\hlqhbis listed above.
Make declension charts for the gi\j\c-Qqn
Do Exercise #19 in the last part of this book.

99
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

M ih (neuter) naf [sarva]

5. g-ending Pronouns in Qqn

Among nafQ\Rs, g-ending |\hlqhbis in neuter decline as hybrids of \Q and naf in

masculine. The first two cases are like \Q, while the rest are like naf in masculine.

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR naf M ih-w{
(all), gi\j\c-nafQ\R-Qqn

adQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

`
viadQR (Singular)
ha^hp (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) nafR ` 1/1 na 1/2 na\fh 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) nafR ` 2/1 na 2/2 na\fh 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) na na\fO\R ` na

dlM (4th case) naf na\fO\R ` naO

qrR (5th case) naf\l/ naf\b ` na\fO\R ` naO

k (6th case) naf nafeP nak\R `

nR (7th case) nafhQ ` nafeP nak M

`
nP[QR (Vocative) zZ naf S/1 zZ na S/2 zZ na\fh S/3

1st and 2nd case and vocative decline like \Q.

The rest declines like naf in qh M .

Other gi\j-gc-nafQ\R (g-ending pronouns):

g another, other ^ both (only in dual) qa f before, east
glj one of the two vi one, someone ha all
lj another qj after, another oneself, ones own
* As for g, glj, and lj, their forms in 1/1, 2/1, and S/1 are gl, ` gljl, ` and ljl, `
respectively.

100
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

M ih (neuter) lb, eb, vlb, hiR `

6. Other Pronouns in Qqn

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR lb ` (that), in neuter

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) ll/lb ` 1/1 lZ l\hQ

hl e\ (2nd case) ll/lb ` 2/1 lZ l\hQ
lsl e\ (3rd case) lZQ l\O\R ` l
dlM (4th case) l l\O\R ` lZO
qrR (5th case) l\l/ l\b ` l\O\R ` lZO
k (6th case) l leP lZk\R `
nR (7th case) lhQ ` leP lZk M
The rest declines like naf. * There is no vocative.
lb ` declines as l, g-ending nafQ\R, except for 1/1 and 2/1.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR eb ` (that which), in neuter

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) el/eb ` 1/1 eZ e\hQ

hl e\ (2nd case) el/eb ` 2/1 eZ e\hQ
lsl e\ (3rd case) eZQ e\O\R ` e
dlM (4th case) e e\O\R ` eZO
qrR (5th case) e\l/e\b ` e\O\R ` eZO
k (6th case) e eeP eZk\R `
nR (7th case) ehQ ` eeP eZk M
The rest declines like naf. * There is no vocative.
eb ` declines as e, g-ending nafQ\R, except for 1/1 and 2/1.

101
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR vlb ` (this), in neuter
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) vll/vlb ` 1/1 vlZ vl\hQ

hl e\ (2nd case) vll/vlb ` 2/1 vlZ vl\hQ

lsl e\ (3rd case) vlZQ vl\O\R ` vl

dlM (4th case) vl vl\O\R ` vlZO

qrR (5th case) vl\l/ vl\b ` vl\O\R ` vlZO

k (6th case) vl vleP vlZk\R `

nR (7th case) vlhQ ` vleP vlZk M

The rest declines like naf. * There is no vocative.

vlb ` declines as vl, g-ending nafQ\R, except for 1/1 and 2/1.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR hiR` (what) in neuter
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) hiR ` 1/1 iZ i\hQ

hl e\ (2nd case) hiR ` 2/1 iZ i\hQ
lsl e\ (3rd case) iZ Q i\O\R ` i
dlM (4th case) i i\O\R ` iZ O
qrR (5th case) i\l/ i\b ` i\O\R ` iZ O
k (6th case) i ieP iZ k\R `
nR (7th case) ihQ ` ieP iZ k M
The rest declines like naf. * There is no vocative.
`
hiR declines as i, g-ending nafQ\R, except for 1/1 and 2/1.

Assignment on pronoun (nafQ\R) in neuter and ges

Do Exercises #20 to #23 in the last part of this book.

102
 Topic IX Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

7. /-ending in qh M (masculine) zhj [hari]/LNM [guru]

-ending and -ending |\hlqhbis have similarities which make them decline in the
same manner. These similarities are discussed on the next page.

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR zhj (Vi:=u), i\j\c-qh M -w{
adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `
ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) zhj 1/1 zj 1/2 zje 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) zhjR ` 2/1 zj 2/2 zj Q ` 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) zhj\ 3/1 zhjO\R ` 3/2 zhjh^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) zjeZ 4/1 zhjO\R ` 4/2 zhjO 4/3

qrR (5th case) zjZ 5/1 zhjO\R ` 5/2 zhjO 5/3

k (6th case) zjZ 6/1 ze( 6/2 zj \R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) zj 7/1 ze( 7/2 zhjk M 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ zjZ S/1 zZ zj S/2 zZ zje S/3

Other i\j-gc-qh M (-ending masculine) |\hlqhbis:

gh fire q\h[ updhi yh' knot ah fire
ghlh guest hk sage Qsqhl king \h[ disease
ghj enemy ihq monkey q\h hand hah[ injunction
ghn sword iha poet Rh jewel jha the sun
hb beginning Lqhl Ga=apati RhM Q - sage n\jh charioteer
bh[ ocean hLhj mountain ehl ascetic

103
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

Observe how the letter at the end of an -ending |\hlqhbi is modified in the declension.
remains as it is in [hari7] 1/1, [harim] 2/1, [hari=] 3/1, [haribhym] 3/2, 4/2, 5/2,
[haribhi7] 3/3, [haribhya7] 4/3, 5/3, and [hari:u] 7/3.
is modified into b f in [har] 1/2, 2/2, S/2, [harn] 2/3, and [har=m] 6/3.
` [haraya7] 1/3, S/3 and [haraye] 4/1.
is modified into ge in
M in [hare7] 5/1, 6/1 and [hare] S/1.
is modified into L
` [haryo7] 6/2, 7/2.
is modified into e in
is modified into in [harau] 7/1.
The letter at the end of an -ending |\hlqhbi will be modified in the declension in
exactly the same manner as at the end of -ending |\hlqhbi.
remains as it is in [guru7] 1/1, [gurum] 2/1, [guru=] 3/1, [gurubhym] 3/2, 4/2, 5/2,
[gurubhi7] 3/3, [gurubhya7] 4/3, 5/3, and [guru:u] 7/3.
is modified into b f in [gur] 1/2, 2/2, S/2, [gurn] 2/3, and [gur=m] 6/3.
` [gurava7] 1/3, S/3 and [gurave] 4/1.
is modified into ge in
M in [guro7] 5/1, 6/1 and [guro] S/1.
is modified into L
` [gurvo7] 6/2, 7/2.
is modified into e in
is modified into in [gurau] 7/1.

The following chart may help in seeing the correspondence in modifications:

Modifications of / of /-ending |\hlqhbis
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) b f (/) ge/ga `

hl e\ (2nd case) b f (/) b f (/)
lsl e\ (3rd case)

dlM (4th case) ge/ga `

qrR (5th case) M (v/)
L
k (6th case) M (v/)
L ` /a)`
e (e b f (/)
nR (7th case) ` /a)`
e (e
nP[QR ` (Vocative) M (v/)
L b f (/) ge/ga `
M an -ending |\hlqhbi in masculine.
Try to make the declension chart for LN,

104
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

` N
Declension of |\hlqhbiR L M (teacher), i\j\c-qh M -w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
|R\ (1st case)
LNM M
1/1 L M
1/2 Lja 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) M ` M M `
LNR 2/1 L 2/2 LQ 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) M M ` M

LN\ 3/1 LNO\R 3/2 LNh^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) M M ` M

LjaZ 4/1 LNO\R 4/2 LNO 4/3

qrR (5th case) M M ` M

LjP 5/1 LNO\R 5/2 LNO 5/3

k (6th case) M M M `
LjP 6/1 La( 6/2 L\R 6/3

nR (7th case) M M M M
Lj 7/1 La( 7/2 LNk 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) M M M
zZ LjP S/1 zZ L S/2 zZ Lja S/3

The declension is identical to zhj.

Other i\j-gc-qh M (-ending masculine) |\hlqhbis:

) the Moon qw M animal RRM
M M mumuk:u n\[ M sdhu
k M arrow o M friend Rs M death hn M sea
l M season o\ arm a\e M wind nZl M bridge
lN tree ho) drop ha M Vi:=u \ M pillar
[\l M root Rz\o\ Arjuna hww M infant zZl M cause

Assignment on /-ending masculine

Make declension charts for the i\j\c and i\j\c-qh M *-|\hlqhbis listed above.
Do Exercises #24 and #25 in the last part of this book.

105
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

8. -ending in qh M (masculine) ils f [kart6]

|\hlqhbi ils f is derived from is [\l M with the suffix ls which denotes the agent of the
action. All the words derived by addition of the suffix ls decline in the same manner as
discussed here. The basic declension is like zhj. The difference is in bold in the chart.

` f (doer), i\j\c-qh M -w{

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ils

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) il\f 1/1 il\fj 1/2 il\fj 1/3

2/1 2/2
hl e\ (2nd case) il\fjR ` il\fj ilQf ` 2/3

3/3
lsl e\ (3rd case) i\f f \R `
3/1 ilsO 3/2 ilshf ^

dlM (4th case) i f \R `

4/1 ilsO f
4/2 ilsO 4/3

qrR (5th case) il fM f \R `

5/1 ilsO f
5/2 ilsO 5/3

k (6th case) il fM 6/1 i( f \R `

6/2 il 6/3

nR (7th case) ilfhj 7/1 i( 7/2 ilskf M 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ ilf S/1 zZ il\fj S/2 zZ il\fj S/3

Other i\j-gc-qh M (-ending masculine) |\hlqhbis:

gZls student b\ls giver |s questioner ,s creator
Lcs goer +s seer ^Pps experiencer zcs injurer
\ls knower [\ls supporter Pls listener zPls priest

Assignment on -ending masculine

Make declension charts for the i\j-gc-qh M *-|\hlqhbis listed above.

Do Exercise #26.

106
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

Now we can take a closer look at the declension process. Declension is done by
`
suffixing nominal suffix (nqM -|e [sup-pratyaya]) to nominal base (|\hlqhbi [prtipadika]).
`
The nqM -|es ` in
were originally taught by P=ini with indicatory letters, or l [it]
`
grammatical terminology. Before being used, the l letters `
are removed from the nqM -|es,
as seen in the next chart.
`
nqM -|es `
(nominal suffixes) without l (indicatory) letters
Singular Dual Plural

1st case `
n [s] [au] `
gn [as]
2nd case `
gR [am] [au] `
gn [as]
3rd case [] `
O\R [bhym] `
h^n [bhis]
4th case v [e] `
O\R [bhym] `
On [bhyas]
5th case `
gn [as] `
O\R [bhym] `
On [bhyas]
6th case `
gn [as] `
n [os] `
R [m]
7th case [i] `
n [os] n M [su]

P=ini observed three different patterns of declension in three different sections in

the declensional chart. These three sections are named as shown below for the sake of
explaining the ways of declension in an efficient manner.
Three sections in masculine and feminine
Singular Dual Plural

1st case `
n [s] [au] `
gn [as]

2nd case `
gR [am] [au]

3rd case

4th case

5th case

6th case

7th case

The |e in this section of the chart is termed nafQ\R\Q [sarvanmasthna].

The g in this section of the chart is termed ^ [bha].

The g in this section of the chart is termed qb [pada].

107
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

`
By suffixing the nqM -|es, the |\hlqhbi is termed g. The last letter of g is modified
`
in a certain manner in each section. Then the g and the nqM -|e are combined. Sandhi
(phonetic change when two sounds meet) may take place if applicable.

Modifications of of -ending g
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

j ` j `
|R\ (1st case)
[kart] [kartrau] [kartra7]
j ` j ` b f ()
hl e\ (2nd case)
[kartram] [kartrau] [kartn]
` )`
e (j
lsl e\ (3rd case)
[kartr] [kart6bhym] [kart6bhi7]
` )`
e (j
dlM (4th case)
[kartre] [kart6bhym] [kart6bhya7]

qrR (5th case)
[kartu7] [kart6bhym] [kart6bhya7]
` )`
e (j b f ()
k (6th case)
[kartu7] [kartro7] [kart=m]
M (g+j)`
L ` )`
e (j
nR (7th case)
[kartari] [kartro7] [kart6:u]

nP[QR ` g j ` j `
(Vocative) [karta7] [kartrau] [kartra7]

In nafQ\R\Q section, becomes , j,` or g

In 5/1, 6/1 and 7/1, special change takes place.

In 2/3 and 6/3, declension is like j\R and zhj.

`
For the rest, e-nh takes place between and the beginning letter of

the suffixes.

In qb section, |\hlqhbi remains the same.

108
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

9. -ending in h (feminine) L\ [gag]

There is no g-ending feminine |\hlqhbi. -ending |\hlqhbi is the basis for declension
of vowel-ending feminine |\hlqhbi. The ending letter of i\j\c- h-|\hlqhbi in this
section is from a feminine suffix .

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR L\ (gag), i\j\c- h-w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) L\ 1/1 LZ 1/2 L\ 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) L\R ` 2/1 LZ 2/2 L\ 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) Le\ 3/1 L\O\R ` 3/2 L\h^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) L\e 4/1 L\O\R ` 4/2 L\O 4/3

qrR (5th case) L\e\ 5/1 L\O\R ` 5/2 L\O 5/3

k (6th case) L\e\ 6/1 LeP 6/2 L\Q\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) L\e\R ` 7/1 LeP 7/2 L\n M 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ LZ S/1 zZ LZ S/2 zZ L\ S/3

`
In qb section, nqM -|es are simply added to |\hlqhbi.

Other i\j-gc- h (-ending feminine) |\hlqhbis:

ga\ state M - cave
Lz\ hQ+\ sleep
\ name hdc\ worry hQ\ firmness
\hei\ story h}\n\ desire to know R\\ garland
\ desire h}\ tongue u\ faith
qR\ example hlhl\ endurance w \ doubt
i\ story be\ compassion n\ name
is q\ mercy bw\ state nZQ\ army
h e\ action bZal\ presiding deity nZa\ - service

109
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

Assignment on -ending feminine

`
Observe the declension. Note that nqM -|e s which are hmls (suffix with m)` , i.e., 4/1,
5/1, 6/1, and 7/1 are modified specially for -ending feminine |\hlqhbi.
1st case (|R\ ha^hp )

o 1/1 looks identical to |\hlqhbi.

o In 1/2, the last letter is replaced by v.
o In 1/3, hanLf is added at the end.
2nd case (hl e\ ha^hp )
` added at the end.
o In 2/1, R is
o 2/2 is always the same as 1/2 for any |\hlqhbi.
o In 2/3, hanLf, instead of Q, ` is added at the end. This is special to feminine words.
3rd case (lsl e\ ha^hp )

o In 3/1, the last letter is shortened and e\ is added.

`
o In 3/2 and 3/3, O\R and h^ are suffixed respectively.
4th case (dlM ha^hp )

o In 4/1, e (special to -ending feminine) is suffixed.

o 4/2 is always the same as 3/2 for any |\hlqhbi.
o In 4/3, O is suffixed
5th case (qrR ha^hp )

o In 5/1, e\ (special to -ending feminine) is suffixed.

o 5/2 and 5/3 are always the same as 4/2 and 4/3 for any |\hlqhbi.
6th case (k ha^hp )

o In 6/1, e\ (special to -ending feminine) is suffixed.

o In 6/2, the last letter is shortened and eP is added at the end
` suffixed. can happen for the suffix.
o In 6/3, Q\R is
7th case (nR ha^hp )
`
o In 7/1, e\R (special M
to -ending feminine) is suffixed with L-nh.
o 7/2 is always the same as 6/2 for any |\hlqhbi.
o In 7/3, n M is suffixed.
M h}\n\, and bZal\.
Make the declension chart for |\hlqhbis: ga\, \, h e\, Lz\,
Do Exercise #27 in the last part of this book.

110
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

10. -ending Pronouns in h (feminine) na\f [sarv]

When pointing to a feminine word, g-ending nafQ\R takes a feminine suffix and
becomes -ending feminine |\hlqhbi. The declension is similar to L\ with exceptions
listed below.
o When hmls (suffixes with m,` i.e., 4/1, 5/1, 6/1, and 7/1) follow, the last letter of
g, , is shortened and suffixes are modified into , \ , \ , \R, ` respectively.
` suffixed, instead of Q\R in
o In 6/3, n\R is ` L\.

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR na\f
(all), i\j\c-nafQ\R- h-w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) na\f na na\f

hl e\ (2nd case) na\fR ` na na\f

lsl e\ (3rd case) nafe\ na\fO\R ` na\fh^

dlM (4th case) naf 4/1 na\fO\R ` na\fO

qrR (5th case) naf\ 5/1 na\fO\R ` na\fO

k (6th case) naf\ 6/1 nafeP na\fn\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) naf\R ` 7/1 nafeP na\fn M

|R\ (1st case) zZ na zZ na zZ na\f

The rest declines like L\.

Other i\j-gc-nafQ\R (-ending pronouns):

g\ another ^\ both (only in dual) qa\f before, east
glj\ one of the two vi\ one, someone ha\ all
lj\ another qj\ after, another \ oneself, ones own

Assignment on -ending pronoun (nafQ\R) in feminine

Make the declension chart for the |\hlqhbis in the list above.
Do Exercise #28 in the last part of this book.

111
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

11. Other Pronouns in h (feminine) lb, eb, vlb, hiR `

`
When pointing to a feminine word, lb, eb, vlb, and hiR become l\, e\, vl\, and i\
respectively with a feminine suffix and decline like -ending nafQ\R.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR lb ` (that), in feminine
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) n\ 1/1 lZ l\

hl e\ (2nd case) l\R ` lZ l\
lsl e\ (3rd case) le\ l\O\R ` l\h^
dlM (4th case) l l\O\R ` l\O
qrR (5th case) l\ l\O\R ` l\O
k (6th case) l\ leP l\n\R `
nR (7th case) l\R ` leP l\n M
The rest declines like na\f. * There is no vocative.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR eb ` (that which), in feminine
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) e\ eZ e\

hl e\ (2nd case) e\R ` eZ e\
lsl e\ (3rd case) ee\ e\O\R ` e\h^
dlM (4th case) e e\O\R ` e\O
qrR (5th case) e\ e\O\R ` e\O
k (6th case) e\ eeP e\n\R `
nR (7th case) e\R ` eeP e\n M
It declines like na\f. * There is no vocative.

112
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR vlb ` (this), in feminine
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) vk\ 1/1 vlZ vl\

hl e\ (2nd case) vl\R ` vlZ vl\

lsl e\ (3rd case) vle\ vl\O\R ` vl\h^

dlM (4th case) vl vl\O\R ` vl\O

qrR (5th case) vl\ vl\O\R ` vl\O

k (6th case) vl\ vleP vl\n\R `

nR (7th case) vl\R ` vleP vl\n M

The rest declines like na\f. * There is no vocative.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR hiR` (what), in feminine
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) i\ iZ i\

hl e\ (2nd case) i\R ` iZ i\
lsl e\ (3rd case) ie\ i\O\R ` i\h^
dlM (4th case) i i\O\R ` i\O
qrR (5th case) i\ i\O\R ` i\O
k (6th case) i\ ieP i\n\R `
nR (7th case) i\R ` ieP i\n M
It declines like na\f. * There is no vocative.

` feminine
Assignment on lb, eb, vlb, hiR in

Do Exercise #29 in the last part of this book.

113
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

12. -ending in h (feminine) Qb [nad]

The ending letter of i\j\c- h-|\hlqhbi in this section is from a feminine suffix
. Some of the derived |\hlqhbis, such as ils,f ePhLQ, ` ^Lal, ` nl, ` take this feminine suffix and
become -ending feminine |\hlqhbi.

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR Qb (river), i\j\c- h-w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) Qb 1/1 Qx 1/2 Qx 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) Qb R ` 2/1 Qx 2/2 Qb 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) Qx\ 3/1 Qb O\R ` 3/2 Qb h^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) Qx 4/1 Qb O\R ` 4/2 Qb O 4/3

qrR (5th case) Qx\ 5/1 Qb O\R ` 5/2 Qb O 5/3

k (6th case) Qx\ 6/1 QxP 6/2 Qb Q\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) Qx\R ` 7/1 QxP 7/2 Qb k M 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ Qhb S/1 zZ Qx S/2 zZ Qx S/3

`
In qb section, nqM -|es are simply added to |\hlqhbi.
f takes place. (Refer R[
In 7/3, R[ f -nh (8.3.59) in Volume 2.)

Other i\j-gc- h (-ending feminine) |\hlqhbis:

a earth bZa goddess a\q pond
i\ Kl QLj - city a\j\n - Vr=as
i\w Vr=as q wife = Derived words =
L\e Gyatr q\afl Prvat i feminine form of ils f
Lj Gaur qsha earth ePhLQ feminine form of ePhLQ `
}QQ mother Rz earth ^Lal feminine form of ^Lal `
h. footnote a\ speech nl feminine form of nl `

114
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

Except for S/1, for all the forms in the declension of -ending feminine, the last
letter of the |\hlqhbi either remains in the same form, or changes into e, ` as a result of e-`
nh with vowel-beginning suffixes, as seen in the following chart. 12
`
The underlined nqM -|es are special for -ending feminine |\hlqhbis.

`
Modifications of of -ending |\hlqhbi with nqM -|es
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) + elided ` )` +

e (e ` )` + gn `
e (e
hl e\ (2nd case) +R` ` )` +
e (e + :
lsl e\ (3rd case) ` )` +
e (e + O\R ` + h^
dlM (4th case) ` )` +
e (e + O\R ` +O
qrR (5th case) ` )` +
e (e + O\R ` +O
k (6th case) ` )` +
e (e ` )` + n `
e (e + Q\R `
nR (7th case) ` )` + R `
e (e ` )` + n `
e (e + nM
nP[QR ` (Vocative) () + elided ` )` +
e (e ` )` + gn `
e (e

Assignment on -ending in feminine

Make the declension chart for |\hlqhbis bZa , qsha , and ^Lal
Do Exercise #30 in the last part of this book.

12
Note that there are some exceptions.
1) (Goddess Lak:m) in 1/1 is , with hanLf. It declines like Qb for the rest.
2) (Goddess Lak:m), [ (intellect), (humility), ^ (fear) in 1/1 are also with hanLf. The last
`
letter is changed into e when suffix beginning with vowel follows.
`
3) (female) in 1/1 is , without hanLf. The last letter is changed into e when suffix beginning
with vowel follows, but the change is optional in 2/1 and 2/3.

115
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

13. -ending in h (feminine) Rhl [mati]

The declension of short -ending feminine |\hlqhbis is a mixture of short -ending

masculine like zhj and long -ending feminine like Qb .
The entire declension is like zhj, except for 2/3 and 3/1, which are like Qb .
`
With nqM -|e `
which is hml (suffix with m.` i.e., 4/1, 5/1, 6/1, and 7/1), there are two
forms: one is like zhj and the other is like Qb .
Many of the -ending feminine |\hlqhbis are derived from [\l M with suffix hl, which
makes feminine |\hlqhbi.

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR Rhl (intellect), i\j\c- h-w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) Rhl Rl Rle

hl e\ (2nd case) RhlR ` Rl Rl 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) R\ 3/1 RhlO\R ` Rhlh^

dlM (4th case) R /RleZ 4/1 RhlO\R ` RhlO

qrR (5th case) R\ /RlZ 5/1 RhlO\R ` RhlO

k (6th case) R\ /RlZ 6/1 RP Rl Q\R `

nR (7th case) R\R/Rl 7/1 RP Rhlk M

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ RlZ zZ Rl zZ Rle

Forms in black are like Qb (-ending feminine). The rest are like zhj (-ending masculine).

Other i\j-gc- h (-ending feminine) |\hlqhbis:

M
gQqqht untenability h view ^hR earth whp power
hp statement |is hl nature, origin RhM p freedom w\hc peace
qqht tenability |\h gain ehM p reasoning hM l ruti
Lhl way ohM u intellect eaM hl girl nsh creation
hlh lunar day ^ hl fear Nhd light shl sm6ti

116
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

Assignment on -ending in feminine

M
Make the declension chart for |\hlqhbis gQqqht, hp, Lhl, |\h, hM l, and shl.
Do Exercises #31and #32 in the last part of this book.

-ending feminine |\hlqhbi and -ending feminine |\hlqhbi are omitted in this book
because they are rarely seen. However, their declensions are easily made by following the
principle of the correspondence of and . Refer back to 7. /-ending in qh M (masculine).

117
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

`
14. Pronoun bR [idam]

`
bR (this) is a nafQ\R |\hlqhbi. It indicates an object which is close to the speaker. vlb `
`
(this) is closer proximity to bR (this).
`
bR (this) declines in all three hs (genders), agreeing with the h of the word it
qualifies.
`
In masculine, bR declines as g in nafQ\R, except as indicated below in black.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR bR` (this) in masculine

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) geR ` 1/1 R 1/2 RZ 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) RR ` 2/1 R 2/2 R\Q ` 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) gQ ZQ 3/1 O\R ` vh^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) g O\R ` vO

qrR (5th case) g\l/g\b ` O\R ` vO

k (6th case) g gQeP 6/2 vk\R `

nR (7th case) ghQ ` gQeP 7/2 vk M

The rest declines like naf. * There is no vocative.

`
In neuter, bR declines like in masculine, except for the first two cases shown below.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR bR` (this) in neuter

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) bR ` 1/1 RZ 1/2 R\hQ 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) bR ` 2/1 RZ 2/2 R\hQ 2/3

` qh M . * There is no vocative.
The rest declines like bR in

118
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

`
In feminine, bR declines as in nafQ\R, except as indicated below in black.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR bR` (this) in feminine

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) eR ` 1/1 RZ 1/2 R\ 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) R\R ` 2/1 RZ 2/2 R\ 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) gQe\ 3/1 O\R ` h^

dlM (4th case) g O\R ` O

qrR (5th case) g\ O\R ` O

k (6th case) g\ gQeP 6/2 n\R `

nR (7th case) g\R ` gQeP 7/2 n M

The rest declines like na\f.

119
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

`
15. Pronoun gbn [adas]

`
gbn (this) indicates an object which is away from the speaker, but is still seen by the
speaker, unlike lb ` (that) which is away and not seen.
`
gbn (that), nafQ\R |\hlqhbi, declines in three hs (genders), agreeing with the h of
the word it qualifies.

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR gbn` (that) in masculine

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) gn 1/1 gR 1/2 gR 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) gRRM ` 2/1 gR 2/2 gRQ ` 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) gRQM \ 3/1 gRO\R ` 3/2 gR h^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) gR M 4/1 gRO\R ` 4/2 gR O 4/3

qrR (5th case) gR M \l/gR M \b ` 5/1 gRO\R ` 5/2 gR O 5/3

k (6th case) M
gR_ M P
6/1 gRe 6/2 gR k\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) gRhM Q ` M P

7/1 gRe 7/2 gR k M 7/3

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR gbn` (that) in neuter

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) gb 1/1 gR 1/2 gRhQ 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) gb 2/1 gR 2/2 gRhQ 2/3

` qh M . * There is no vocative.
The rest declines like gbn in

120
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR gbn` (that) in feminine

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) gn 1/1 gR 1/2 gR 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) gRR ` 2/1 gR 2/2 gR 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) gReM \ 3/1 gRO\R ` 3/2 gRh^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) M

gR_ 4/1 gRO\R ` 4/2 gRO 4/3

qrR (5th case) M \

gR_ 5/1 gRO\R ` 5/2 gRO 5/3

k (6th case) M \
gR_ M P
6/1 gRe 6/2 gRk\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) M \R ` 7/1 gReM P

gR_ 7/2 gRk M 7/3

Note: Among pronouns vlb, bR, ` gbn, ` and lb, the following order is generally used
based on the increasing distance from the speaker, vlb ` being the closest to the speaker,
and lb ` the farthest:
`
vlb ` (this) < bR (this) < gbn ` (that) < lb ` (that)

`
Assignment on bR and gbn `

Do Exercise #33 in the last part of this book.

121
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

16. Pronouns e M b ` [yu:mad], gb ` [asmad]

e M b ` (you) and gb ` (I, we) are nafQ\R-|\hlqhbis. They respectively indicate the listener
and speaker. For example:

` Lhn II/1 S (You come.)

R 1/1 ` L\hR I/1 S (I come.)
gzR 1/1
` L
eaM \R 1/2 II/2
S (You two come.) ` L\a
a\R 1/3 I/2
S (We two come.)
` L II/3 S (You all come.)
eeR 1/3 ` L\R
aeR 1/3 I/3
S (We all come.)
` qe\hR I/1 S (I see you.)
\R 2/1 ` j II/1 S (May you protect me.)
R\R 2/1
` qiR
bR 1/1 M ` e M \h^
1/1 3/3
q lZ III/1 S ` qiR
bR 1/1 M ` g\h^
1/1 3/3
q lZ III/1 S
(This book is read by you all.) (This book is read by us all.)
la 6/1 qM 1/1
S (your son) RR 6/1 qM 1/1
S (my son)
` gh III/1 S
he 7/1 a efR 1/1 ` gh III/1 S
Rhe 7/1 a efR 1/1
(There is ability in you.) (There is ability in me.)

e M b ` (you) and gb ` (I, we) have the same forms in all 3 hs.
`
E.g., R m/1/1 bZabt m/1/1
S `
R f/1/1 q\afl f/1/1
S `
R n/1/1 `
hRR n/1/1 S
`
E.g., gzR m/1/1 bZabt m/1/1
S `
gzR f/1/1 q\afl f/1/1
S `
gzR n/1/1 `
hRR n/1/1 S

In 2nd, 4th, and 6th case, there are optional forms.

E.g., j 1/1
a 2/3 ` jl M III/1S (May the Lord protect you all.)
jl M III/1, e M \Q 2/3
E.g., QR 0
lZ 4/1, QR 0
` S (Salutations to you)
M R 4/1
lO
E.g., a 4/3
` QR 0S (Salutations to you all)
QR 0, e M OR 4/3
E.g., lZ 6/1 qiR
M ` , la 6/1 qiR
1/1
M ` S (your book)
1/1

` LszR 1/1
E.g., a\R 6/2 ` , eaM eP 6/2
` S (the house of you two)
LszR 1/1
E.g., a 6/3
d\ef 1/1
` d\ef
, e M \iR 6/3 1/1
S (the teacher of you all)

E.g., j 1/1
` jl M III/1S (May the Lord protect us two.)
Q 2/2 jl M III/1, a\R 2/2
` bb\l M III/1 S (May he give to me.)
E.g., RZ 4/1 bb\l M III/1, RR 4/1
E.g., Q 4/3
` h 0S (May auspiciousness be on us all.)
h 0, gOR 4/3
E.g., RZ 6/1 hnhu 1/1
, RR 6/1 hnhu 1/1
S (my success)
` , aeP
E.g., Q 6/2 LszR 1/1 6/2
` S (the house of us two)
LszR 1/1
E.g., Q 6/3
d\ef 1/1
` d\ef
, g\iR 6/3 1/1
S (our teacher)

122
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

` M b ` (you, the listener) in all genders

Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR e
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) R ` 1/1 eaM \R ` 1/2 eeR ` 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) \R/\ 2/1 eaM \R/a\R `

2/1 2/2 e M \Q/a 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) e\ 3/1 eaM \O\R ` 3/2 e M \h^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) M R/lZ

lO 4/1 eaM \O\R/a\R ` 4/2 e M OR/a
4/1 4/3

qrR (5th case) l ` 5/1 eaM \O\R ` 5/2 e M l ` 5/3

k (6th case) la/lZ 6/1 eaM eP /a\R ` 6/2 e M \iR/a 6/3

nR (7th case) he 7/1 eaM eP 7/2 e M \n M 7/3

`
Declension of nafQ\R-|\hlqhbiR gb ` (I, we, the speaker) in all genders
adQR `
ha^hp viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case) gzR ` 1/1 a\R ` 1/2 aeR ` 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) R\R/R\ 2/1 a\R/Q

2/1 2/2 g\Q/Q 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) Re\ 3/1 a\O\R ` 3/2 g\h^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) RR/RZ 4/1 a\O\R/Q 4/2 gOR/Q 4/3

qrR (5th case) Rl ` 5/1 a\O\R ` 5/2 gl ` 5/3

k (6th case) RR/RZ 6/1 aeP /Q 6/2 g\iR/Q 6/3

nR (7th case) Rhe 7/1 aeP 7/2 g\n M 7/3

* There is no vocative.

Assignment on e M b ` and gb `

Do Exercise #34 in the last part of this book.

123
 Topic VIII Declension of Vowel-ending Nominal bases and Pronouns

17. Referring to the same object again (g\bZw [anvdea7]) with bR/vlb `
When one object is mentioned for conveying something, then, again the same object
is mentioned for conveying something else, that mentioning of the same object for the
second time is called g\bZw [anvdea7] in grammatical terminology.
`
When bR (this)/vlb ` (this) are used in g\bZw [anvdea7], they assume different
forms in the 2nd case (2/1, 2/2, and 2/3), 3/1, 6/2, and 7/2. In these cases, the |\hlqhbi is
replaced by vQ in all three genders. Note that they are not optional forms of bR/vlb.
g\bZw (referring again) of bR` (this) and vlb ` (this) in masculine

viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case)

hl e\ (2nd case) vQR ` 2/1 vQ 2/2 vQ\Q ` 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) vQQZ 3/1

dlM (4th case)

qrR (5th case)

k (6th case) vQeP 6/2

nR (7th case) vQeP 7/2

The rest declines as usual.

g\bZw (referring again) of bR` (this) and vlb ` (this) in neuter

viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case)

hl e\ (2nd case) vQl/vQb ` 2/1 vQ Z 2/2 vQ\hQ 2/3

The rest (excepting 1st case) declines like masculine.

g\bZw (referring again) of bR` (this) and vlb ` (this) in feminine

viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

|R\ (1st case)

hl e\ (2nd case) vQ\ 2/1 vQ Z 2/2 vQ\ 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) vQe\ 3/1

dlM (4th case)

qrR (5th case)

k (6th case) vQeP 6/2

nR (7th case) vQeP 7/2

The rest declines as usual.

124
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

Topic X
Declension of
Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
Declension is done by suffixing nominal suffix (nqM -|e [sup-pratyaya]) to nominal
base (|\hlqhbi [prtipadika]). This concept is most useful when declining consonant-ending
|\hlqhbis because most of the declined forms are made by simply combining |\hlqhbi and
`
nqM -|e.
While combining, Consonant Sandhi rules are applied in many places. Therefore,
all the topics in Volume 2 Phonetics & Sandhi have to be completed before starting this
section.

Common steps in declension of zc (consonant-ending) |\hlqhbi

`
nqM -|es `
without l (indicatory) letter are suffixed to |\hlqhbi (nominal base).
M +
E.g., nL ` n 1/1
`

In 1/1, |e n` is elided after consonant.

M +
E.g., nL ` 1/1
`
Sandhi rules apply between the last letter of |\hlqhbi and the first letter of nqM -|e. If
the g is qb, that becomes an extra condition for Sandhi rule. The reference is given
with the P=ini-stra numbers which are found in the Consonant Sandhi section in
Volume 2.
` O\R 3/2
E.g., RNl + `
`
RNb ` + O\R 3/2 The last consonant at the end of qb is softened. (Ref. 8.3.29)
` the end of the qb (word, declined form), is changed into hanLf.
n at
M +
E.g., nL ` gn 1/3
`

M
nLn `
1/3

1/3
M
nL

125
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
nqM -|es ` in
were originally taught by P=ini with indicatory letters, or l [it]
`
grammatical terminology. When being used, l (indicatory) letters are removed, as seen in
the next charts.
`
nqM -|es `
(nominal suffixes) without l (indicatory) letters

Singular Dual Plural

1st case `
n [s] [au] `
gn [as]
2nd case `
gR [am] [au] `
gn [as]
3rd case [] `
O\R [bhym] `
h^n [bhis]
4th case v [e] `
O\R [bhym] `
On [bhyas]
5th case `
gn [as] `
O\R [bhym] `
On [bhyas]
6th case `
gn [as] `
n [os] `
R [m]
7th case [i] `
n [os] n M [su]

`
nqM -|es (nominal suffixes) modified for declension in neuter

Singular Dual Plural

1st case `
-/gR [am] * [] [i]
2nd case `
-/gR [am] * [] [i]

* When |\hlqhbi ends with short g, the suffix is gR. ` Otherwise, the suffix is elided.
The 3rd case onwards is the same as for masculine and feminine.

Note that there is no 8th case. The suffixes of the 1st case (|R\ ha^hp ) alone are used
`
in the sense of vocative (nP[QR [sambodhanam]). However, the singular form of vocative
may be different from the normal singular form of the 1st case. For the sake of addressing
this only, the extra row for vocative (nP[QR)` is added in a declensional chart. To avoid
confusing with the original 1st case, abbreviations S/1, S/2, and S/3 are used in this book.
The student has to be aware that S stands for the 1st case in vocative (nP[QR).`

126
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

P=ini observed three different patterns of declension in three different sections in

the declensional chart. They are named as shown below for the sake of explaining the
ways of declension in an efficient manner.

Three sections in masculine and feminine

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `
ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) `

n [s] [au] `
gn [as]

hl e\ (2nd case) `
gR [am] [au]

lsl e\ (3rd case)

dlM (4th case)

qrR (5th case)

k (6th case)

nR (7th case)

Three sections in neuter

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `
ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
|R\ (1st case) [i]
hl e\ (2nd case) [i]

The rest is the same as masculine and feminine.

The |e in this section of the charts is termed nafQ\R\Q [sarvanmasthna].

The g in this section of the chart is termed ^ [bha].

The g in this section of the chart is termed qb [pada].

127
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
1. -ending in qh M (masculine)/ h (feminine) nL `
M [suga=]

`
M (one
nL who counts well)13 is the simplest for declension among all |\hlqhbis.
Declension is done as follows:

M +
nL ` n 1/1
` `
nqM -|e `
without l letter is suffixed for declension.
M +
nL ` 1/1
` 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.
n of
nL `
M 1/1 This is the final form of 1/1.

M +
nL ` 1/2 nqM -|e
` is suffixed for declension.
1/2
M
nL This is the final form of 1/2.
Etc.
M ` (one who counts well) i\j\c-w{
` L
Declension of |\hlqhbiR n

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) M `

nL M
1/1 nL M
1/2 nL 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) M
nLR ` M
2/1 nL M
2/2 nL 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) M

nL\ M
3/1 nLO\R ` 3/2 nLh^
M 3/3

dlM (4th case) M

nLZ M
4/1 nLO\R ` 4/2 nLO
M 4/3

qrR (5th case) M

nL M
5/1 nLO\R ` 5/2 nLO
M 5/3

k (6th case) M
nL M
6/1 nLP M
6/2 nL\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) M
nLh M
7/1 nLP M
7/2 nLn M 7/3

`
nP[QR (Vocative) M `
zZ nL M
S/1 zZ nL M
S/2 zZ nL S/3

nL `
M (one who counts well) can be masculine or feminine, depending on the gender
M . ` In either gender, it declines in the same manner.
of the |\hlqhbi qualified by the word nL

13
` derived from qnLf n M (well) and [\l M L (to
M is
The |\hlqhbi nL ` count) with zero-suffix denoting

the agent of the action. By this suffix, the whole thing becomes |\hlqhbi.

128
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

Words which decline in the same manner:

e, ` g ` |\z\j (abbreviations used in P=ini grammar)

`
Words which decline in the same manner except for 7/3, where n becomes k. ` (Ref. 8.3.59):
z, , vm ` |\z\j (abbreviations used in P=ini grammar)

`
Assignment on -ending in masculine and feminine

M , ` e, ` z, and ` in 24 forms by the steps shown:

Decline nL

`
z ` + n 1/1 `
nqM -|e `
without l letter is suffixed for declension.
z ` + 1/1
` 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.
n of
z ` 1/1 This is the final form of 1/1.

z ` + 1/2 `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
z 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.

`
z ` + gn 1/3 `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
z 1/3
` the end of qb becomes hanLf. This is the final form of 1/3.
The last n at
....
z ` + 7/1 `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
zh 7/1 This is the final form of 7/1.

`
z ` + n 7/2 `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
zP 7/2
` the end of qb becomes hanLf. This is the final form of 7/2.
The last n at

z ` + n M 7/3 `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
z ` + k M 7/3 ` suffix becomes R[
n in f because ` is preceding. (Ref. 8.3.59)
z0k M 7/3 This is the final form of 7/3.

Do Exercise #35 in the last part of this book.

129
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
2. l/b/[/^-ending `
in qh M (masculine)/ h (feminine) RNl [marut]

For |\hlqhbis ending with ` (consonants from 1st to 4th of the classes and sibilants),
the last letter becomes 3rd of the class at the end of qb. (Ref. 8.2.39)
However, it becomes hardened in 7/3, and optionally in 1/1. (Ref. 8.4.55, 8.4.56)
`
The steps of declension of RNl (wind god) are described below.

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR RNl` (wind god) li\j\c-qh M -w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) RNl/RNb ` 1/1 RNl 1/2 RNl 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) RNlR ` 2/1 RNl 2/2 RNl 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) RNl\ 3/1 RN O\R ` 3/2 RNh ^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) RNlZ 4/1 RN O\R ` 4/2 RN O 4/3

qrR (5th case) RNl 5/1 RN O\R ` 5/2 RN O 5/3

k (6th case) RNl 6/1 RNlP 6/2 RNl\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) RNhl 7/1 RNlP 7/2 RN M 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ RNl/RNb ` S/1 zZ RNl S/2 zZ RNl S/3

M .`
The rest is like nL
Steps of declension
` n 1/1
RNl + ` `
nqM -|e `
without l letter is suffixed for declension.
` 1/1
RNl + ` 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.
n of
RNb ` 1/1 The consonant at the end of qb becomes softened. (Ref. 8.3.29)
`
RNl 1/1 Optionally, the last consonant is hardened. (Ref. 8.4.56)
RNl/RNb ` 1/1 These are the final forms of 1/1.

` 1/2
RNl + `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
RNl 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.
...

130
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

In qb section:
` O\R 3/2
RNl + ` nqM -|e
` is suffixed for declension.
` The consonant at the end of qb becomes softened. (Ref. 8.3.29)
RNb ` + O\R 3/2
`
RN O\R 3/2 This is the final form of 3/2.

` n M 7/3
RNl + `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
RNb ` + n M 7/3 The consonant at the end of qb becomes softened. (Ref. 8.3.29)
` n M 7/3
RNl + The consonant followed by hard consonant becomes hardened. (Ref. 8.4.55)
RN M 7/3 This is the final form of 7/3.

These |\hlqhbis decline in the same manner: (m. = masculine; f. = feminine)

`
l-ending words:
gl ` - m. short g naf^ls ` - m./f. the one who supports everything
haxlM ` - f. lightning is iRfisl ` - m./f. the one who has done everything

b-ending words:
M `
nb - m. friend nafhab ` - m./f. one who knows everything
Rsb ` - f. clay qb ` - f. calamity
nb ` - f. wealth qhQkb ` - f. upani:ad

` b
Declension of |\hlqhbiR n M ` (friend) bi\j\c-qh M -w{

Singular Dual Plural `

M ` + n 1/1
nb
1st case M `1/1
M /nb
nl M 1/2
nb M
nb 1/3 M ` 1/1
nb

2nd case nl `
M 1/1 (Ref. 8.4.56)
M
nbR `
2/1
M 2/2
nb M
nb 2/3

3rd case M 3/1

nb\ `
nM O\R 3/2 M ^
nh 3/3 M ` + 1/2
nb

4th case
M 1/2
nb
M 4/1
nbZ `
nM O\R 4/2 nM O 4/3

5th case nb `
M ` + O\R 3/2
M
nb 5/1
`
nM O\R 5/2 nM O 5/3

M O\R
nb ` `
3/2
6th case M
nb 6/1
M
nbP 6/2
M
nb\R ` 6/3

M ` + n M 7/3
nb
7th case M
nhb 7/1
M
nbP 7/2
nM M 7/3

M +
nl ` n M 7/3 (Ref. 8.4.55)
Vocative M `S/1
M /nb
zZ nl M S/2
zZ nb M
zZ nb S/3
nM M 7/3

131
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
[-ending words:
[M ` - f. hunger nhR[ ` - f. fuel

` [M ` (hunger) [i\j\c- h-w{

Declension of |\hlqhbiR ` n 1/1
[M + `

Singular Dual Plural ` 1/1

[M +

1st case bM ` 1/1 (Ref. 8.2.39)

lM /bM `1/1 [M 1/2 [M 1/3

`
lM 1/1 (Ref. 8.4.56)
nd
2 case [M R ` 2/1
[M 2/2
[M 2/3

` 1/2
[M +
rd
3 case [M \ 3/1
M O\R ` 3/2
hM ^ 3/3
[M 1/2
4th case [M Z 4/1 `
M O\R 4/2 M O 4/3
` O\R 3/2
[M + `
5th case [M 5/1
`
M O\R 5/2 M O 5/3
bM O\R
` `
3/2
(Ref. 8.2.39)

6th case [M 6/1

[M P 6/2
`
[M \R 6/3 ` n M 7/3
[M +

7th case bM ` + n M 7/3 (Ref. 8.2.39)

hM [ 7/1 [M P 7/2
M M 7/3
` n M 7/3
lM + (Ref. 8.4.55)
Vocative S/1 S/2 S/3
zZ lM /bM ` zZ [M zZ [M
M M 7/3

`
^-ending words:
M ` - f. a name of meter
gQM ^ iiM^ ` - f. direction
`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR gQ M ` (a name of meter) ^i\j\c- h-w{
M ^

Singular Dual Plural ` n 1/1

gQMM ^ + `
` 1/1
gQMM ^ +
1st case `
gQM qM /gQM oM 1/1 gQM ^
M
1/2
gQM ^
M
1/3
`
gQMM o 1/1 (Ref. 8.2.39)
nd
M R`
2 case 2/1 2/2 2/3
gQM ^ gQM ^
M gQM ^
M `
gQMM q 1/1 (Ref. 8.4.56)
rd
M \R `
3 case 3/1 3/2 3/3
gQM ^
M \ gQM 1 gQM hM 2 ` 1/2
gQMM ^ +

4th case gQMM ^ 1/2

M \R `
4/1 4/2 4/3
gQM ^
M Z gQM 1 gQM 1
M
` O\R 3/2
gQMM ^ + `
5th case gQM ^
M
5/1
M \R `
gQM 1 5/2
gQM 1
M
5/3
`
gQMM 1\R 3/2 (Ref. 8.2.39)
6th case gQM ^
M
6/1
gQM ^
M P
6/2
M \R `
gQM ^ 6/3
` n M 7/3
gQMM ^ +
7th case gQM hM ^ 7/1 7/2 7/3 ` n M 7/3
gQMM o +
gQM ^
M P M M
gQM (Ref. 8.2.39)
` n M 7/3
gQMM q + (Ref. 8.4.55)
Vocative ` zZ gQM ^
zZ gQM qM /gQM oM S/1 M
S/2
zZ gQM ^
M
S/3
gQMM M 7/3
`
Assignment on l/b/[/^-ending in masculine and feminine
Decline all the |\hlqhbis in the above lists by the steps shown, and do Exercise #36.

132
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
3. d/}-ending `
in qh M (masculine)/ h (feminine) d [6c]

` the end of qb. (Ref.

` L at
For |\hlqhbis ending with d/}, ` the last letter becomes i/
8.2.30) Other steps such as softening and hardening are the same as before.

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR d` (hymn, mantra) di\j\c-qh M -w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) ` L `

i/ 1/1 d 1/2 d 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) dR ` 2/1 d 2/2 d 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) d\ 3/1 3\R ` 3/2 h4 3/3

dlM (4th case) dZ 4/1 3\R ` 4/2 3 4/3

qrR (5th case) d 5/1 3\R ` 5/2 3 5/3

k (6th case) d 6/1 dP 6/2 d\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) hd 7/1 dP 7/2 M 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) ` L ` S/1 zZ d

zZ i/ S/2 zZ d S/3

The rest declines like RNl. `

` n 1/1
d + ` ` 1/2
d + ` n M 7/3
d +
` 1/1
d + d 1/2 i ` + n M 7/3 (Ref. 8.2.30)
i ` + 1/1 (Ref. 8.2.30) ` O\R 3/2
d + ` ` n M 7/3
L + (Ref. 8.2.39)
` 1/1
L + (Ref. 8.2.39) i ` + O\R 3/2
` (Ref. 8.2.30) ` k M 7/3
L + (Ref. 8.3.59)
i ` + 1/1 (Ref. 8.4.56) ` O\R 3/2
L + ` (Ref. 8.2.39) i ` + k M 7/3 (Ref. 8.4.55)

`
d-ending words:
a\d ` - f. word d ` - f. skin
`
}-ending words:
h} ` - m. priest h^k} ` -m. doctor
`
Assignment on d/}-ending in masculine and feminine
Decline all the |\hlqhbis in the above lists by the steps shown, and do Exercise #37.

133
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
4. Q-ending `
in qh M / h ePhLQ [yogin]/ePhLQ [yogin]

`
The |\hlqhbi ePhLQ [yogin] `
is derived from the word ePL [yoga] by suffixing Q [in], a
`
suffix in the sense of one who has .... Thus, ePhLQ means one who is with ePL.
In the declension in masculine: (See the next page for the steps.)
`
In 1/1, the elongation (b f ) of the penultimate (q[\) and the elision of Q of
|\hlqhbi are observed, while in S/1 |\hlqhbi remains the same.
` |\hlqhbi takes place. (Ref. 8.2.7)
At the end of qb, the elision of the last Q of

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR ePhLQ` (one who is with ePL) Qi\j\c-qh M -w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) ePL 1/1 ePhLQ 1/2 ePhLQ 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) ePhLQR ` 2/1 ePhLQ 2/2 ePhLQ 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) ePhLQ\ 3/1 ePhLO\R ` 3/2 ePhLh^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) ePhLQ Z 4/1 ePhLO\R ` 4/2 ePhLO 4/3

qrR (5th case) ePhLQ 5/1 ePhLO\R ` 5/2 ePhLO 5/3

k (6th case) ePhLQ 6/1 ePhLQP 6/2 ePhLQ\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) ePhLhQ 7/1 ePhLQP 7/2 ePhLk M 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ ePhLQ ` S/1 zZ ePhLQ S/2 zZ ePhLQ S/3

M .`
The rest declines like nL
`
Q-ending words:
gh[i\hjQ ` - eligible person w\hfQ ` - the Lord Vi:=u
\hQQ ` - one who has knowledge w\hQ ` - one who knows the scripture
bZhzQ ` - one who has a body nn\hjQ `- sasrin
qhQ ` - bird n\hQ ` - witness
|\hQ ` - one who lives \hRQ ` - master
ahjQ ` - enemy zhQ ` - elephant

134
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

In the declension in feminine, a feminine suffix is added to |\hlqhbi, resulting in

ePhLQ , and it declines like Qb .

`
Assignment on Q-ending in masculine/feminine

Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the list above, both in masculine and
feminine.
Do Exercise #38 in the last part of this book.

Steps of declension:
` n 1/1
ePhLQ + ` `
nqM -|e `
without l letter is suffixed for declension.
` 1/1
ePhLQ + ` 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.
n of
`
ePL Q 1/1 `
Being Q-ending |\hlqhbi, in 1/1 the penultimate is elongated.
ePL 1/1 ` |\hlqhbi is elided. (Ref. 8.2.7)
At the end of qb, the last Q of

` n S/1
ePhLQ + ` `
nqM -|e `
without l letter is suffixed for declension.
` S/1
ePhLQ + ` 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.
n of
`
ePhLQ S/1 For nP[Q, the elongation of the penultimate (q[\b f ) and the elision of Q `
does not take place.

` 1/2 nqM -|e

ePhLQ + ` is suffixed for declension.
ePhLQ 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.
...
In qb section:
` O\R 3/2
ePhLQ + `
` nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
` |\hlqhbi is elided. (Ref. 8.2.7)
` At the end of qb, the last Q of
ePhL + O\R 3/2
`
ePhLO\R 3/2 This is the final form of 3/2.

` n M 7/3 nqM -|e

ePhLQ + ` is suffixed for declension.
ePhL + n M 7/3 ` |\hlqhbi is elided. (Ref. 8.2.7)
At the end of qb, the last Q of
ePhL + k M 7/3 ` M , n in
Being preceded by -i ` suffix becomes R[
f . (Ref. 8.3.59)
ePhLk M 7/3 This is the final form of 7/3.

135
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
5. Rl/al-ending `
in qh M / h ^Lal [bhagavat]/^Lal [bhagavat]

`
The |\hlqhbi ^Lal [bhagavat] is derived from the word ^L [bhaga] (virture) by
`
suffixing Rl [mat], ` changed into a `
` Rl is
a suffix in the sense of one who has .... The R of
when |\hlqhbi ends with g/. Thus, the form becomes ^Lal,` and it means one who
has ^L.
In the declension in masculine: (See the next page for the steps.)
` inserted after the last vowel of |\hlqhbi.
In nafQ\R\Q, an extra letter Q is
`
In 1/1, the elongation (b f ) of penultimate (q[\) of the extra Q and the elision of l `
` |\hlqhbi is observed.
of |\hlqhbi are observed, while in S/1 only the elision of l of
Other than nafQ\R\Q, it declines like RNl. `

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR ^Lal` (the Lord) gc-qh M -w{ 14

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) ^La\Q ` 1/1 ^Lac 1/2 ^Lac 1/3

2/1 2/2
hl e\ (2nd case) ^LacR ` ^Lac ^Lal 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) 3/1 ^Lab `O\R ` 3/2 ^Labh^ 3/3

^Lal\

dlM (4th case) ^LalZ 4/1 ^Lab `O\R ` 4/2 ^Lab `O 4/3

qrR (5th case) ^Lal 5/1 ^Lab `O\R ` 5/2 ^Lab `O 5/3

k (6th case) ^Lal 6/1 ^LalP 6/2 ^Lal\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) ^Lahl 7/1 ^LalP 7/2 ^La M 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ ^LaQ ` S/1 zZ ^Lac S/2 zZ ^Lac S/3

The rest declines like RNl. `

In the declension in feminine, a feminine suffix is added to |\hlqhbi, resulting in
^Lal , and it declines like Qb .

14
All the suffixes in this section end with gl. M |\hlqhbis ending with such suffix are called gc.

136
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
Rl-ending words:
[Qal ` - one who has wealth ohM uRl ` - one who has ohM u
al -` one who has hax\al `- one who has knowledge
Rl ` - one who has wealth M ` - Hanumanji
zQRl
The following |\hlqhbis are derived with different suffixes than Rl, ` but they decline in the
same manner in both masculine and feminine. (Llal , l\al , ^al , etc.)
Llal ` - one who has gone lM al ` - one who has heard
pal ` - one who has said al ` - one who has seen
l\al ` - that much ^al ` - respectful way to address you

`
Assignment on Rl/al-ending in masculine/feminine
Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the above lists, both in masculine and
feminine.
Do Exercise #39 in the last part of this book.
Steps of declension:
In nafQ\R\Q section:
` n 1/1
^Lal + ` `
nqM -|e `
without l letter is suffixed for declension.
` 1/1
^Lal + ` 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.
n of
`
^Lac 1/1 `
Being Rl-suffix ` inserted
ending |\hlqhbi, in nafQ\R\Q an extra letter Q is
after the last vowel of |\hlqhbi.
`
^La\c 1/1 `
Being Rl-suffix ` elongated.
ending |\hlqhbi, in 1/1 the g before the Q is
`
^La\Q 1/1 ` elided.
Being the last letter of conjunct consonants at the end of qb, l is

`
^LaQ S/1 In nP[Q, the entire steps are the same as 1/1 except for the elongation.

` 1/2 nqM -|e

^Lal + ` is suffixed for declension.
` 1/2 Being Rl-suffix
^Lac + ` ` inserted
ending |\hlqhbi, in nafQ\R\Q an extra letter Q is
after the last vowel of |\hlqhbi.
^Lac 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.
For the rest of nafQ\R\Q, declension is like 1/2.

In other sections: Same as RNl `

137
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
6. wls- ending in qh M / h nl [sat]/nl [sat]

`
The |\hlqhbi nl [sat] `
is derived from the [\l M gn [as] (to be, to exist) by suffixing wls
`
[at6], whose content is only gl [at], a suffix in the sense of one who is doing .... After
some modifications, the form becomes nl,` and it means one who is existing.
In the declension in masculine:
` inserted after the last vowel of |\hlqhbi.
In nafQ\R\Q, an extra letter Q is
`
In 1/1 and S/1, the last l drops. Other than nafQ\R\Q, it declines like RNl. `
`
Note: the only difference between the declensions of Rl/al-ending and wls- ending
masculine is the presence and absence respectively of the elongation (b )f of penultimate
(q[\) in 1/1.

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR nl` (being, one who is existing) wc-qh M -w{ 15

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) nQ ` 1/1 nc 1/2 nc 1/3

2/1 2/2
hl e\ (2nd case) ncR ` nc nl 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) 3/1 nb `O\R ` 3/3

nl\ 3/2 nbh^

dlM (4th case) nlZ 4/1 nb `O\R ` 4/2 nb `O 4/3

qrR (5th case) nl 5/1 nb `O\R ` 5/2 nb `O 5/3

k (6th case) nl 6/1 nlP 6/2 nl\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) nhl 7/1 nlP 7/2 n M 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ nQ ` S/1 zZ nc S/2 zZ nc S/3

The rest declines like RNl. `

In the declension in feminine, a feminine suffix is added to |\hlqhbi, resulting in
nl , and it declines like Qb .

15
`
The |\hlqhbi which ends with wls is called wc.(wls + gc with e-nh)

138
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

wls-ending words:
qdl ` - one who is cooking qel ` - one who is seeing
hll ` - one who is standing \el ` - one who is meditating

Assignment on wls- ending in masculine

Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the above list in masculine.
Do Exercise #40 in the last part of this book.

139
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
7. gQ-ending `
in qh M (masculine) Q [tman]

In nafQ\R\Q, except for S/1, elongation (b )f of penultimate (q[\) takes place.

` |\hlqhbi takes place (Ref.
At the end of qb, except for S/1, the elision of the last Q of
8.2.7).
`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR Q` (self) gQ-gc-q
` h M -w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) \ 1/1 \Q 1/2 \Q 1/3

2/1 2/2
hl e\ (2nd case) \QR ` \Q Q 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) 3/1 O\R ` 3/2 h^ 3/3

Q\

dlM (4th case) Q Z 4/1 O\R ` 4/2 O 4/3

qrR (5th case) Q 5/1 O\R ` 5/2 O 5/3

k (6th case) Q 6/1 QP 6/2 Q\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) hQ 7/1 QP 7/2 n M 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ Q ` S/1 zZ \Q S/2 zZ \Q S/3

The rest declines like ePhLQ. `

`
gQ-ending masculine words:
gQ ` - way, path Q ` - Brahmj
gRQ ` - stone ^RQ *` - many-ness
Q ` - steam RhzRQ *` - greatness
q\5Q ` - q\q j\}Q *` - king
`
* In ^ section, the g of the last gQ disappears (optional in 7/1) and the form will become
j\ 2/3
, j\\ 3/1, j\Z 4/1, j\ 5/1, 6/1
, j\P 6/2, 7/2
` , j\h or j\}hQ 7/1.
, j\\R 6/3

140
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

Steps of declension:
In nafQ\R\Q section:
` n 1/1
Q + ` `
nqM -|e `
without l letter is suffixed for declension.
` 1/1
Q + ` 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.
n of
`
\Q 1/1 `
Being gQ-ending |\hlqhbi, in nafQ\R\Q the penultimate g is elongated.
\ 1/1 ` |\hlqhbi is elided. (Ref. 8.2.7)
At the end of qb, the last Q of

` n S/1
Q + ` `
nqM -|e `
without l letter is suffixed for declension.
` S/1
Q + ` 1/1 is to be elided after consonant.
n of
`
Q S/1 For nP[Q, the elongation of the penultimate (q[\b f ) and the elision of Q `
do not take place.

` 1/2
Q + `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
`
\Q + `
Being gQ-ending |\hlqhbi, in nafQ\R\Q the penultimate g is elongated.
\Q 1/2 This is the final form of 1/2.

In ^ section:
` gn 2/3
Q + ` `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
Q 2/3
` the end of qb becomes hanLf.
This is the final form of 2/3. n at

|\hlqhbi with * in the list in ^ section:

` gn 2/3
j\}Q + ` `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
` gn 2/3
j\} Q` + ` `
For some Q-ending ` elided. (Optional in 7/1)
|\hlqhbis, the g of gQ is
` +
j\} `
` gn 2/3 `
Because of the contact with }, ` Q becomes . ` (Ref. 8.4.40)
j\ 2/3
` the end of qb becomes hanLf.
This is the final form of 2/3. n at

In qb section:
The same as ePhLQ. ` The last Q of
` |\hlqhbi is elided at the end of qb. (Ref. 8.2.7)

`
Assignment on gQ-ending in masculine
Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the list above.
Do Exercise #41 in the last part of this book.

141
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
8. gQ-ending `
M ih (neuter) Q [brahman]
in Qqn

`
The rules for declension of gQ-ending in masculine and neuter are the same. The
`
only difference is the modified nqM -|es in 1st and 2nd case in neuter, by which the gs for
singular and dual are termed qb and ^, respectively, and the suffix in plural is termed
nafQ\R\Q.
M
In neuter, n-|e in 1st and 2nd cases are specially modified as shown before.

Singular Dual Plural

1st case - * [] [i]

2nd case - * [] [i]

* When |\hlqhbi ends with a letter other than a short g, the suffix is elided.

In nafQ\R\Q, elongation (b )f of penultimate (q[\) takes place.

` |\hlqhbi takes place. (Ref. 8.2.7)
At the end of qb, the elision of the last Q of

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR Q` (brahman) gQ-gc-Qq
` n M ih-w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) 1/1 1/2

\h 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) 2/1 2/2 \h 2/3

3/1 3/2
lsl e\ (3rd case) \ O\R ` h^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) Z 4/1 O\R ` 4/2 O 4/3

qrR (5th case) 5/1 O\R ` 5/2 O 5/3

k (6th case) 6/1 P 6/2 \R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) h 7/1 P 7/2 n M 7/3

S/1 S/2
nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ Q ` zZ zZ \h S/3

` qh M .
The rest declines like Q in

142
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
gQ-ending neuter words:
iRfQ ` - action [\RQ *` - place PRQ *` - space, sky
}7Q ` - birth Q\RQ *` - name
`
* In ^ section, the g of the last gQ disappears (optional in 7/1) and the form will become -
Q\ 1/2, 2/2
, Q\\ 3/1, Q\Z 4/1, Q\ 5/1, 6/1
, Q\P 6/2, 7/2
` , Q\h 7/1 or Q\RhQ 7/1.
, Q\\R 6/3

Steps of declension:
In 1/1, S/1, and 2/1:
` 1/1
Q + `
n M and gR are elided when |\hlqhbi in neuter does not end with a short g.
1/1 ` |\hlqhbi is elided. (Ref. 8.2.7)
At the end of qb, the last Q of

` S/1
Q + `
For nP[Q, the elision of Q does not take place.

In ^ section:
` 1/2
Q + `
The modified form of nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
1/2
`
When applicable, R takes place (Ref. 8.4.2).

|\hlqhbi with * in the list in ^ section:

` 1/2
Q\RQ + `
The modified form of nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
` 1/2
Q\R Q` + `
For some Q-ending ` elided. (Optional in 7/1)
|\hlqhbis, the g of gQ is
1/2
Q\ This is the final form of 1/2.

In nafQ\R\Q section:
` 1/3
Q + `
The modified form of nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
` 1/3
\Q + `
Being gQ-ending |\hlqhbi, in nafQ\R\Q the penultimate g is elongated.
\h 1/3 `
When applicable, R takes place (Ref. 8.4.2).

In qb section:
The same as Q. ` The last Q of
` |\hlqhbi is elided at the end of qb. (Ref. 8.2.7)

`
Assignment on gQ-ending in neuter
Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis listed above.
Do Exercise #42 in the last part of this book.

143
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
9. gn-ending `
M ih (neuter) RQn [manas]
in Qqn

` inserted after the last vowel of |\hlqhbi. Then, the

In nafQ\R\Q, an extra letter Q is
`
elongation (b f) of penultimate (q[\) of the extra Q takes `
place. Finally, that Q becomes
M
gQ\j because of the following n. ` (Ref. 8.3.24)
` the end of qb becomes hanLf. Then modifications by hanLfnh
In qb section, the n at
are observed according to the following letter. (Ref. hanLfnh )

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR RQn` (mind) gn-gc-Qq
` n M ih-w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) 1/1 1/2 1/3

RQ RQn RQ\hn

hl e\ (2nd case) RQ 2/1 RQn 2/2 RQ\hn 2/3

3/1 3/2
lsl e\ (3rd case) RQn\ RQPO\R ` RQPh^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) RQnZ 4/1 RQPO\R ` 4/2 RQPO 4/3

qrR (5th case) RQn 5/1 RQPO\R ` 5/2 RQPO 5/3

k (6th case) RQn 6/1 RQnP 6/2 RQn\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) RQhn 7/1 RQnP M RQ n M

7/2 RQ8/ 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) S/1 S/2

zZ RQ zZ RQn zZ RQ\hn S/3

The rest declines like Q. `

`
gn-ending neuter words:
v[n ` - fuel lRn ` - darkness j}n ` - dust
dZln ` - consciousness lZ}n ` - brilliance adn ` - speech, word
n ` - the Veda qen ` - milk, water aen ` - age
lqn ` - religious discipline ewn ` - fame hwjn ` - head
`
gn-ending adjective words:
Lj en ` - more important eZ n ` - better

144
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

Steps of declension:
In 1/1, S/1, and 2/1:
` 1/1
RQn + `
n M and gR are elided when |\hlqhbi in neuter does not end with a short g.
RQ 1/1
` the end of qb becomes hanLf.
n at

In ^ section:
` 1/2
RQn + `
The modified form of nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
1/2
RQn

In nafQ\R\Q section:
` 1/3
RQn + `
The modified form of nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
` 1/3
RQ9 + `
Being n-ending ` inserted after the
|\hlqhbi, in nafQ\R\Q an extra letter Q is
last vowel of |\hlqhbi.
` 1/3 The penultimate of the extra Q is
RQ\9 + ` elongated.

RQ\hn 1/3 `
Within a qb, Q followed `
by n becomes M
gQ\j. (Ref. 8.3.24)

In qb section:
` O\R 2/3
RQn + ` `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
`
(RQ + O\R 2/3 ` the end of qb as though16 becomes hanLf.)
n at
`
RQP+ O\R 2/3 QRP QR nh (Ref. Volume 2 in hanLfnh ) is as though applied.

` n M 7/3
RQn + `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
RQ + n M 7/3 ` the end of qb becomes hanLf.
n at
RQn+ n M 7/3 ` hanLf when n follows.
The optional n for ` (Ref. Volume 2 in hanLfnh )

`
Assignment on gn-ending in neuter
Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the list above.
Do Exercise #43 in the last part of this book.

16
This becoming hanLf and its modifications are said to be as though because they do not happen
through the process of P=ini-stras.

145
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
10. k/k-ending `
M ih (neuter) Phlk [jyoti:]/d
in Qqn `
kM [cak:u:]

`
The declension is similar to gn-ending neuter.
` the end of qb becomes hanLf, like the n at
In qb section, the k at ` the end of qb does.17

Then hanLfnh modifications are applied, according to the letter which follows. (Ref.
hanLfnh )
`
When ^ (soft `
consonant) follows, n becomes jZ (PhlO\fR, ` etc.)
f due to the in Phlk. `
` n M becomes R[
In 7/3, the n of

`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR Phlk` (light) k-gc-Qq
` n M ih-w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) 1/1 1/2 1/3

Phl Phlk Pl:hk

hl e\ (2nd case) Phl 2/1 Phlk 2/2 Pl:hk 2/3

3/1 3/2
lsl e\ (3rd case) Phlk\ PhlO\fR ` Phlh^f 3/3

dlM (4th case) PhlkZ 4/1 PhlO\fR ` 4/2 PhlOf 4/3

qrR (5th case) Phlk 5/1 PhlO\fR ` 5/2 PhlOf 5/3

k (6th case) Phlk 6/1 PhlkP 6/2 Phlk\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) Phlhk 7/1 PhlkP M Phl k M

7/2 Phl;/ 7/3

nP[QR ` (Vocative) S/1 S/2

zZ Phl zZ Phlk zZ Pl:hk S/3

`
k-ending neuter words:
ghdfk ` - ray of light zhak ` - oblation
`
k-ending neuter words:
`
The declension is the same as for k-ending. Just change into , and into .
ekM ` - life [QkM ` - bow

17
`
k/k-ending `
|\hlqhbis here are derived with suffixes n and n, ` respectively. The n at
` the end of

f when it is not at the end of qb. (Ref. 8.3.59)

these suffixes becomes R[

146
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

e}kM ` - sacrificial prayer aqkM ` - body

Steps of declension:
In 1/1, S/1, and 2/1:
` 1/1
Phlk + `
n M and gR are elided when |\hlqhbi in neuter does not end with a short g.
Phl 1/1 ` the end of qb becomes hanLf, just like n at
k at ` the end of qb does.

In ^ section:
` 1/2 The modified form of nqM -|e
Phlk + ` is suffixed for declension.
1/2
Phlk This is the other final form.

In nafQ\R\Q section:
` 1/3 The modified form of nqM -|e
Phlk + ` is suffixed for declension.
` 1/3 Being k-ending
Phl< + ` ` inserted after the
|\hlqhbi, in nafQ\R\Q an extra letter Q is
last vowel of |\hlqhbi.
` 1/3 The penultimate of the extra Q is
Pl < + ` elongated.

Pl:hk 1/3 `
Within a qb, Q followed `
by k becomes M
gQ\j. (Ref. 8.3.24)

In qb section:
` O\R 2/3
Phlk + ` `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
`
(Phl + O\R 2/3 ` the end of qb as though becomes hanLf, just like n at
k at ` the end of qb

does.)
`
Phlj+ O\R 2/3 M \ nh (Ref. Volume 2 in hanLfnh ) is as though applied.
LNf

` n M 7/3
Phlk + `
nqM -|e is suffixed for declension.
Phl + n M 7/3 ` the end of qb becomes hanLf, just like n at
k at ` the end of qb does.

Phl k M 7/3 ` nqM -|e

n of ` f . This is one of the final forms.
becomes R[
Phl; M 7/3 This is the other final form.

`
Assignment on k/k-ending in neuter
Make the declension charts for the |\hlqhbis in the above lists.
Do Exercise #44 in the last part of this book.

147
 Topic X Declension of Consonant-ending Nominal bases

`
11. gn-ending `
in qh M (masculine) dRn [candramas]

`
The gn-ending masculine is easy to decline.
In 1/1, the elongation (b f) of penultimate (q[\) takes place.
In S/1, the elongation (b f) of penultimate (q[\) does not take place.
In qb section, the declension is the same as RQn, ` gn-ending
` neuter.
`
For the rest, just simply combine the |\hlqhbi and nqM -|e. ` the end of qb always
n at
becomes hanLf.
`
Declension of |\hlqhbiR dRn` (moon) gn-gc-q
` h M -w{

adQR ` viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `

ha^hp (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)

|R\ (1st case) dR\ 1/1 dRn 1/2 dRn 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) dRnR ` 2/1 dRn 2/2 dRn 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) dRn\ 3/1 dRPO\R ` 3/2 dRPh^ 3/3

dlM (4th case) dRnZ 4/1 dRPO\R ` 4/2 dRPO 4/3

qrR (5th case) dRn 5/1 dRPO\R ` 5/2 dRPO 5/3

k (6th case) dRn 6/1 dRnP 6/2 dRn\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) dRhn 7/1 dRnP M dR n M 7/3

7/2 dR8/

nP[QR ` (Vocative) zZ dR S/1 zZ dRn S/2 zZ dRn S/3

M .`
In qb section, it declines like RQn. ` The rest declines like nL

`
gn-ending masculine words:
aZ[n ` - the creator M
nRQn ` - the one who has good mind
QhdiZ ln ` - name of a boy who appears in Ka;hopani:ad

148
 `
Topic XI Nouns in Apposition (nR\Q\h[ijR [samndhikara=am])

Topic XI
Nouns in Apposition
`
(nR\Q\h[ijR [samndhikara=am])

In a sentence there can be two or more nouns in the same case. These two words
can be:
In apposition (nR\Q\h[ij [samndhikara=a])
When these two words indicate the same (nR\Q) object (gh[ij), they are
said to be in apposition. (nR\Q\h[ij [samndhikara=a])
1/1 1/1
M
E.g., 1) nj o\ ^ahl S (There is a beautiful boy.)
Not in apposition (h[ij [vyadhikara=a])
When these two indicate different objects, they are not in apposition
(h[ij).
1/1 1/1
E.g., 2) o\ L} d ^al S (There is a boy and an elephant.)

When nouns are in apposition, two types of relationship are possible. Note that the
relationship can only be determined contextually.
A. Adjective/substantive relationship
(hawZk-hawZ_-^\a [vie:a=a-vie:ya-bhva7])
B. Noun/predicate relationship
(=Ze-ha[Ze-^\a [uddeya-vidheya-bhva7])

149
 `
Topic XI Nouns in Apposition (nR\Q\h[ijR [samndhikara=am])

A. Adjective/substantive relationship (hawZk-hawZ_-^\a [vie:a=a-vie:ya-bhva7])

Adjective qualifies substantive.

This can be called qualifying (hawZk)-qualified (hawZ_)-relationship (^\a).

They can be subject, object, or anything in the sentence. They can be in any case.
1/1 1/1
M
Ex. 1) nj o\ ^ahl S (There is a beautiful boy.)
M
Ex. 2) njR ` o\R 2/1
2/1
` qehl S (He sees a beautiful boy.)

M 3/1 o\ZQ 3/1 nz Lhl S (He goes with a beautiful boy.)

Ex. 3) njZ
4/1
M
Ex. 4) nj\e o\\e 4/1 bb\hl S (He gives to a beautiful boy.)
M
Ex. 5) nj\l 5/1
` }\elZS (Something is born of a beautiful boy.)
` o\\l 5/1
6/1
M
Ex. 6) nj o\ 6/1 LZz ghS (There is a house of a beautiful boy.)
M 7/1 o\Z 7/1 ^hp ghS (There is devotion in a beautiful boy.)
Ex. 7) njZ

B. Noun/predicate relationship (=Ze-ha[Ze-^\a [uddeya-vidheya-bhva7])

The noun is known to both speaker and listener, while the predicate is known only

to the speaker, not to the listener. To convey what the listener does not know yet

about the noun, the speaker predicates the noun.

This can be called noun (=Ze)-predicate (ha[Ze)-relationship (^\a).

They can be subject and subjective complement.

1/1 1/1
E.g., 1) o\ M
nj ^ahl S (The boy is beautiful.)
In this case, the boy is the subject and beautiful is the subjective complement.
They can be object and objective complement.

` njR
E.g., 2) n\ o\R 2/1 M ` RlZ S (She considers the boy beautiful.)
2/1

In this case, the boy is the object and beautiful is the objective complement.

150
 `
Topic XI Nouns in Apposition (nR\Q\h[ijR [samndhikara=am])

Concord between nouns in apposition

Matching of the h (gender) and adQ (number) of words is called concord.

When the words are adjective and substantive, the adjective has to be in the same

gender and number as the substantive.

m/1/3 m/1/3 m/1/3
E.g., 1) oza M
nj\ \ ^ahc S (Many beautiful pots exist.)
f/1/3 f/1/3 f/1/3
E.g., 2) o> M
nef Qx ^ahc S (Many beautiful rivers exist.) 18
E.g., 3) o?hQ n/1/3 nj\h
M n/1/3
\hQ n/1/3 ^ahc S (Many beautiful fruits exist.)

When they are noun and predicate, the matching of gender and number is not
mandatory.
E.g., 1) \ 6/1 bZal\ f/1/1 ghQ m/1/2 S (The presiding deity of the nose is the two
Avins.)
`
E.g., 2) na\fh n/2/3 ahQ n/2/3 jR m/2/1 RZ I/1 S (I consider all objects as vara.)

18
M takes a feminine suffix and become nj
When used in feminine, the adjective nj M . It
M , ne%,
declines as -ending feminine, like Qb . (nj M M
nef , etc.)

151
 `
Topic XII Indeclinables (geR [avyayam])

Topic XII
Indeclinables
`
(geR [avyayam])

ge literally means that which does not decline.19

M
Among nouns (nocs) in Sanskrit, some nouns are called ges.
Technically speaking, ge is a subset of |\hlqhbi. Being |\hlqhbi, ge has to be
`
suffixed with nqM -|e in order to become qb, usable form in the language. Thus, ge-qb is
M
noc-qb M
only. (In many textbooks ge is counted separately from noc-qb but this is not
considered to be correct according to P=inis grammar system.)
The only difference from ordinary |\hlqhbis is that ge does not decline by
`
suffixing nqM -|e. That is why it is called indeclinable.
The following is a list of ge often seen in the language.

d and
Positioning of the di\j 20 between words.
E.x. 1) A d B d S (A and B)
E.x. 2) A B d S (A and B)
o Unlike in English, there is no such usage as A d B.

Positioning of the di\j between sentences.

o di\j is generally placed as the second word in the next sentence.
E.g., bZabt LNM haQeZQ QRhl S va d Q\ n w\ qhl S
(Devadatta salutes his guru with humility.

19
Q Zhl hl geRS
20
Conventionally, the indeclinable d is referred to by the word di\j.

152
 `
Topic XII Indeclinables (geR [avyayam])

And having saluted in this manner, he studies the scripture.)

ebt bQ Q \bhl S y\R d Q Lhl S
(Yajadatta does not eat rice. And he does not go to the village.)
o No sentence starts with d.

di\j can bring in some words from the previous sentence.

E.g., j\R 1/1
` Lhl III/1 S (Rma goes to the forest.)
aQR 2/1
1/1
d S (Lak:ma=a also (goes to the forest).)
` Lhl III/1 are brought down from the previous sentence.
By d, aQR 2/1

a\ or
Same positioning as di\j
` vlhQ a\
E.g., lb ` a M lhQ a\ ` Q elZ S (That object is not seen there or here.)

l M whereas, however, indeed

Same positioning as di\j
E.g., j\R LhlS l M hlhl S (j\R goes. Whereas, stays.)

hz indeed, because
Same positioning as di\j
E.g., ^P}QQZ hz [M \ w\hl S (By eating alone the hunger is appeased.)
gh z gh, [RP hz elZ S (Fire must be here because the smoke is seen.)

hl - thus
Converts the words/sentence that comes before into w{q (direct speech).
E.g., ijPhk hl LNM R\ abhlS (Teacher tells me you do.)
In Sanskrit, there is no indirect speech.
Where the quote starts is understood by the context only.

va only, indeed
Restriction
E.g., viRZa ijPhR S (I take only one.)

153
 `
Topic XII Indeclinables (geR [avyayam])

`
ga[\jR (emphasis)
E.g., gz lM vaS (I am indeed happy.)

Q no, not
Q always goes with a verb.
` haxlZ S (There is no purifier equivalent to knowledge.)
E.g., Q hz \QQZ nw qhaR z
When compounded with a word beginning with a consonant, the form becomes g.
E.g., Q [Rf (in sentence) = g[Rf (in compound)
When compounded with a word beginning with a vowel, the form becomes gQ. `
E.g., Q \ (in sentence) = gQ\\ (in compound)

vaR ` in this manner, thus

E.g., l va nhlS (When that is so, ... When that is the case, )

ghq even, also

E.g., iae ghq g RPhzl\ S (Even poets are confused in this subject.)
E.g., j\R bwj qM S ghq bwj qM S
(Rma is a son of Daaratha. Lak:ma=a is also a son of Daaratha.)

a as though, like
E.g., bZabt R a abhlS (Devadatta talks as though he is confused.)

dZl ` if
`
E.g., q\q ijPhl dZl Qji LhR_hlS (If you do the Ppa, you will go to Naraka.)

154
 `
Topic XII Indeclinables (geR [avyayam])

ges derived from [\l M

When there is more than one action done by the same il\f (agent) in a sentence, the
`
last action has to be told by hlmc-qbR (verb). Other actions, which happen chronologically
before the last action, can be told by ge words derived from the [\l M of the action and the
suffix \ [tv].
For example, in the sentence Having remembered a verse, he knows the meaning.,
the action of remembering takes place before knowing. Thus, the first action is told by
suffixing \ to the [\l M s (to remember), resulting in s\ (having remembered), and the
action of knowing is told by hlmcqbR, ` oP[hl (he knows).
Note that each action can take its own iRf, ij, gh[ij, etc.

Flow of time Having remembered a verse, ` s\ 0

&PiR 2/1

He knows the meaning. ` oP[hl III/1

gRf 2/1

Action which takes place before the main action = remembering of verse
= [\l M + |e \ [tv]
= s + \
= s\ [sm6tv] (remembering, having remembered)
The main action = knowing of the meaning
= [\l M + hlm-` |e
` hl
= o[M +
= oP[hl (he knows.)

When the [\l M takes qnLf, the suffix \ is replaced by e.

E.g., gQ M + ^ (to experience) + e = gQ^
M e (having experienced)
` approach) + e = qL (having approached)
E.g., q + LR (to
` added after the [\l.M
If the [\l M ends with (short vowel), the extra letter l is
` e = |
E.g., | + M (to start) + l + M (having started)
` e = has (having forgotten)
E.g., ha + s (to forget) + l +

155
 `
Topic XII Indeclinables (geR [avyayam])

The following is a list of \-ending ges.

^ (1P) to be + \ = ^\ (having become)

o gQ M + ^ (to experience) + e = gQ^
M e (having experienced)

`
LR (1P) to go + \ = L\ (having gone)
` approach) + e = qL (having approached)
o q + LR (to
` understand) + e = gaL (having understoood)
o ga + LR (to
\ (9P) to know + \ = \\ (having known)
o ha + \ (to know) + e = ha\e (having known)
is (8U) to do + \ = is \ (having done)
o gh[ + is (to be entitled to, to refer to) + e = gh[is (having made a topic of)
s (1P) to remember + \ = s\ (having remembered)
o ha + s (to forget) + e = has (having forgotten)
`
ns} (6P) to create + \ = ns@\ [s6:;v] (having created)
` release) + e = hans (having released)
o ha + ns} (to
`
w (1P) to see + \ = @\ [d6:;v] (having seen)
`
} (1P) to give up + \ = A\ [tyaktv] (having given up)
^} `
M (7U) M [bhuktv] (having eaten, having experienced)
to eat, experience + \ = ^A\
`
RQ (4A) to consider + \ = R\ (having considered)
`
zQ (2P) to destroy + \ = z\ (having destroyed)
hab ` (2P) to know + \ = hahb\ (having known)

Assignment on ges derived from [\l M

Do Exercise #22 in the last part of this book.

156
 `
Topic XII Indeclinables (geR [avyayam])

ges derived from nafQ\Rs

The following are |es and their meanings, which are suffixed to certain nafQ\Rs to
create ges.

`
ln [tas] in the sense of 5th case ending

` el from which, because (same as e\l)`

eb ` + ln =
` ll from that, therefore, because of that (same as l\l)`
lb ` + ln =
0
E.g., el akfhl III/1 ll 0
hl\hR III/1 S (Because it rains, thus I stay.)
` gl from this, therefore, because of this (same as vl\l)`
vlb ` + ln =
` ln =
hiR + ` iMl from where, why, because of what (same as i\l)`

` nafl on all sides, everywhere (same as naf\l)`

naf + ln =

[tra] in the sense of 7th case ending

eb ` + = e where (to make a relative clause), (same as ehQ)`

lb ` + = l there (same as lhQ)`
vlb ` + = g here (same as vlhQ)`
E.g., e 0 e 0 [R 1/1
l 0 l 0 ah 1/1
S (Wherever smoke is, there is fire.)21
` = z here (same as ghQ)`
bR +
` = iM, B where (same as ihQ)`
hiR +

b\ in the sense of 7th case ending, limited to the sense of time

`
eb ` + b\ = eb\ which time (to make a relative clause), (same as ehQ i\Z )
` )
lb ` + b\ = lb\ that time (same as lhQ i\Z
`
naf + b\ = nafb\, nb\ all the time, always (nafhQ i\Z )

\ showing a manner

eb ` + \ = e\ just as (same as eZQ |i\jZ)

lb ` + \ = l\ in that manner (same as lZQ |i\jZ)
E.g., e\ 0 z 0 l\ 0 gRM 0 S (Just like here, in the same manner there.)
` \ = iR ` in which manner, how (same as iZ Q |i\jZ)
hiR +

21
When a word is repeated twice, it can be an indication of covering everything.

157
 `
Topic XII Indeclinables (geR [avyayam])

` hdl/dQ = indefinite pronoun

Any declined form of hiR +
`
hdl and ` all genders, cases, and
dQ are indeclinable particles used with hiR in
numbers, and any word derived from hiR, ` to convey indefinite sense.
E.g., ihl/iQ Lhl S Someone goes.
E.g., iZ hdl/iZ dQ }Q\ S Some people.
E.g., ihl/iQ Q Lhl S Somebody does not go./Anybody does not go./Nobody goes.
E.g., ihdl/idQ [QRS Wealth of somebody.
M ^lZ S He somehow gains happiness.
E.g., ihrl/irQ n

Assignment on ges derived from nafQ\R

Do Exercise #23 in the last part of this book.

158
 Appendix

Preview of Volume 3 - Derivatives (qraste [pacavttaya7])

qraste = five types of asht

asht = single word which has the meaning of two words

1. nQ\xc[\l-M asht (A new root derived from a root or a noun)

[\l M /nocR
M ` nQ\hb|e = new [\l M called nQ\xc[\l M
+
Rd ` liberate) + nQ (to
M (to ` desire) = RRM
M (to desire to liberate)

From the new [\l M RRM

M , RRM
M M , RRM
M \, etc., are derived.

` cause something/someone do) = \hq (to cause to stay)

\ (to stay) + hd (to
From the new [\l M \hq, \qehl, \qe, \qhe\, \qQR, ` etc., are derived.

` ht (A new nominal base derived from a root)

2. is l-as
`
[\l M + is l-|e `
= new |\hlqhbiR called is bcR `
`
is (to do) + lsd (agent of action) = ils f (doer)
` be) + wls (agent of present action) = nl (one
gn (to ` who is being)
is (to do) + Cl (object of past action) = is l (that which is done)
\ (to know) + M ` (gQ) (instrument of action) = \Q (means of knowing)
wi ` (to be able) + hpQ (hl)
` (action itself) = whp (ability)

3. lhul-asht (A new nominal base derived from a nominal base)

` lhul|e = new |\hlqhbiR called
|\hlqhbiR + ` lhul\cR `
`
[slj\D + (of Dh6tar:;ra) + g (g) (descendant) = [\lfj\D (descendant of Dh6tar:;ra)
vi + (of one) + () (status) = vi (oneness)
` (status) = aj\ e (vairgya)
haj\L + (of virga) + _ (e)
` )` (one who has) = ^Lal (bhagavat)
^L + (bhaga) + Rlq M (Rl `

ePL+ (yoga) + hQ (Q)` (one who has) = ePhLQ (yogin)

`

159
 Appendix

4. nR\n-asht (A new nominal base derived by compounding nouns)

M
nocR ` aqf bR)` + nocR
(q M `
(tjqbR)` = new |\hlqhbiR called
` nR\nasht

1. ge ^\a-nR\n (Type A) qaqf bR ` + tjqbR `

`
o The meaning of qaqf bR has predominance. (qaqf b-g-f |[\QR)`

o The compound word is ge.

`
whpR (capacity) gQhl (not exceeding) e\whp (in keeping with ones capacity)
S e\ is in the sense of in keeping with.

M
2. lENk-nR\n (Type T)
qaqf bR ` + tjqbR `

`
o The meaning of tjqbR has predominance. (tjqb-g-f |[\QR)`
o Gender and number of the compound are the ones of the tjqb.
M (of teacher) iM (home) LNi
LjP `
M M R (gurukula)

3. oF hz-nR\n (Type B)
qaqf bR ` + tjqbR ` gqbR `

` word other than the two) has predominance. (gqb-

o The meaning of gqbR (a
g f-|[\QR)`
o Gender and number of the compound are the ones of the gqb.
`
q lR (yellow) gj (clothes) e (for whom) n q l\j ha M S

4. G-nR\n (Type D)
qaqf bR ` + tjqbR `

o The meanings of both words have equal predominance. (^eqb-g f-|[\QR)`

o Gender of the compound is the gender of the last word. Number of the
compound is the total number of the items in the compound.
q\afl d qjRZj d q\afl qjRZj S j\R n l\ d n l\j\R or j\Rn lZ S

5. viwZk-asht (A new nominal base derived by keeping one word out of many)
R\l\ (mother) d hql\ (father) d hqlj (parents), R\l\hqlj (mother and father) a\ S
j\R j\R j\R S ; j\R j\R j\R j\R\ S

160
 Exercises

Exercise #1 ` (present tense) ilfhj (active voice) with 1P [\lsM

Common information
i\j (tense/mood) : ` (present tense)
|ePL (voice) : ilfhj|ePL (active voice)

hlmc qbR ` Information of Information of hlm-` |e (verbal suffix) English

(verb) [\l M person / number M /adQR `

qNk translation

^ahl III/1 ^ (1P) to exist 3rd person/singular M /viadQR `

|RqNk He is

ikhf c

Lhn

djhc

} ahl

QR\hR

qlhc

qehl

hlhc

j\hR

Qe\hR

L\hR

qehc

} a\hR

an\R

jhc

ql

161
 Exercises

M Pw (dictionary of roots)
Exercise #2 [\li
M Pw and find appropriate [\l M according to the forms given in the list.
Consult [\li

hlmc qbR ` Information of [\l M Information of hlm-` |e (verbal suffix) English

(verb) person / number M /adQR `

qNk translation

gd\fR I/3 `
gd f (1P) to worship 1st person/plural M /odQR `
tRqNk We worship

khc

\bhn

dhl

}ehn

}q\R

lql

ljhl

bzhc

[\a

qd\hR

hqohl q\ (1P) to drink

HR

F}\hR

abhn

az\hR

wPdhc

zjhl

znhn

162
 Exercises

Exercise #3 - [\l M with qnLf in the second part of [\li

M Pw

with qnLf meaning with qnLf III/1 Translation

^ (1P) to be gQ M + ^ to experience M
gQ^ahl He experiences
` ^
nR +
`
LR (1P) to go ga + LR `

+ LR `

gh^ + LR `

gh[ + LR `

dj `(1P) to go + dj `

| + dj `
`
an (1P) to dwell hQ + an `

q + an `

s (1P) to remember ha + s
`
o[M (1P) to know | + o[M `
` o[M `
nR +

ab ` (1P) to speak gQ M + ab `

|hl + ab `
` ab `
nR +
`
F} (1P) to go qhj + F} `

(1U) to take away qhj +

b ` + +

RzM ` (4P) to be confused ha + RzM `

` RzM `
nR +
`
hbw (6U) to show q + hbw `
`
haw (6P) to enter q + haw `

| + haw `
`
q (5P) to pervade | + q `

is (8U) to do gQ M + is

q + is

\ (9P) to know ha + \

163
 Exercises

Exercise #4 Q Zqb [\lsM

Verb [\l M Translation Verb [\l M Translation

^cZ III/3 `
^ (1A) to obtain They obtain. }\elZ

Z }\ecZ

o\[cZ b lZ

RPblZ qxlZ

RPbZ qxcZ

elcZ M nZ
o

jR\RzZ M \RzZ
o

jRZ RnZ

alfl Z RZ

alfc Z RlZ

nZalZ M
e Z Z

nZanZ haxlZ

w nZ haxcZ

^Z haxZl Z

^\azZ nslZ

wP^Zl Z g lZ

nzZ zlZ

elZ Z v}\azZ

i\wlZ v[lZ

i\wnZ lZ

^\knZ dZcZ

^\kZ becZ

all Z PinZ

cZ a[fl Z

nZacZ lZ

jRcZ qdlZ

w \RzZ e}\RzZ

el\RzZ nelZ

164
 Exercises

Exercise #5 [\l M with qnLf in the second part of [\li

M Pw

with qnLf meaning with qnLf III/1 Translation

`
(1A) to see qhj + `

` `
nR +

|hl + `

`
^\k (1A) to speak |hl + ^\k `

RbM ` (1A) to rejoice | + RbM `

gQ M + RbM `

`
jR (1A) to play, rejoice gh^ + jR `

q + jR `

`
asl (1A) to be ghl + asl `

gQ M + asl `

hQ + asl `

| + asl `

ha + hQ + asl `

w ` (1A) to doubt +w `

`
j^ (1A) to begin + j^ `

`
nZa (1A) to serve q + nZa `

`
}Q (4A) to be born q + }Q `

gh^ + }Q `

`
RQ (4A) to consider gh^ + RQ `

qb ` (4A) to gain q + qb `

|hl + qb `

` qb `
nR +

165
 Exercises

Exercise #6 iRfh |ePL (passive voice)

[\l M III/1 Translation III/3 Translation

q ` (1P) to study q lZ It is studied. q cZ They are studied.

LR `

w `

QR `

Q
`
gn (4P)

qkM `

wkM `
`
k (6P)

hbw `

h `

\ (9P)
`
q (5P)

o\[ `

^ `

w `

nZa `

ad ` lZ

ga + LR `

gh[ + LR `

q + LR `

q + hbw `

gQ M + ^

q + ^ `

+w `

ha + \

| + q `

166
 Exercises

Exercise #7 Other i\js than `

Identify verbs in the following: `

6. \R lZ na Q ^ha_hc S (.)

h ` 7. ae Q ^ha_\R S (.)

1. a\} an nafabZ n bb S (i .) 8. gz i ePM\hR S (.)

2. `
u\ lR haaZ
w S (i .) ` [ nN\R Q ihj_hn S
9. R R

3. l: o^o z S (.I) `
10. q\qR ga\ hn S

4. [^ ] wJ b S (.) 11. Rz\j\ RcZ S

5. R\[a q\a d wJ |b l M S (.) 12. e\hn S

6. wJ\Q b` M S (.K) `
13. o?Q ahb_hc S

`
7. aZb\n l [RfR qhQoo S 14. L |\ hn S

8. g}QfM eu `
M \l qjj\R, qj[R d |aasl Z S 15. Rz: ^P nZ S

9. hw_ Q hadd\ S 16. iRfo |z\hn S

10. n }L}f d S 17. ohM u hllhj_hl S

`
11. aN hqljR qnn\j S (l .) `
18. eb\ ohM u hQ\ \hl lb\ ePLR ga\ hn S

19. gz \j\l Q` P_hn S

`
20. lZ hzl a \hR S
1. Q ge ^hal\ S
21. e R qjR LR `
M gh^[\hl `
n R\R v_hn S
`
2. l\l g RZ h|elj Q ^hal\ S(K.LI)
22. la adQ ihj_Z S
3. lb\ hQab Lc\hn S

P `
s `
1. gal M R\R S`
1. l ahb_\hR S
M ^a\}QfM S
2. hQ LeP
2. i R\ b\hn S (i .)
3. nZQeP ^eP RZ RZ j \qe S (.)
3. hi ihj_hl S (i .)
`
4. q\ f vl\Q nRaZ ` M Q qe
l\Q i ` S (.)
4. Q ePMZ S (.I)
5. ht qjcq S (.)
5. b RZ ^ha_hl S (L.)
`
6. l\Q hlhl ^\jl S

167
 Exercises

7. lb ` hahu S 3. nQ\n is \ a iMe\fl S`

8. R\ M S `
4. [gz] ^PL\Q ^ M e S (.)

M ^\jl S
9. e 5. [ae] }eZR S

`
10. wjR gh S 6. [lZ] Q }eZe M S

M S
11. ePL\e e 7. el ` eZ \l ll
`
` hz S

12. eZhn l\ iMN S `

8. n hi |^\kZl, hiR n l, hi F}Zl S

13. i\Z Rhl qhjl\R S` M

9. gz eZ e\R S`

` hahQLfl\R S`
14. hQ}Lsz\l l 10. [Rf jhl \l S`

` \R S`
11. gzR
m `
M RZl S
12. ep
1. nR^al S`
`
13. e\ l aljQ l\ l al\ S
M
2. lbZa\Q|\hawl S`
14. iP jRZl S
3. nPRl S (iO .)
15. a M qOZl S
` n l S`
4. bR gyZ
16. o \R S`
5. ghll S`
17. na qsh\ bzZeR S`
6. bZa\ ge}c S

7. g\ g}\ec S w hfm `

` M g}\el S
8. |\\l a\e 1. RPP RZ ^e\l S`

` M afl S (.)
9. [RfZ Z nRaZl\ eeM M a hiR gi 2. gRsl [\j ^e\nR S`

`
10. j\}\ adQR ga l S` (.)
m `
11. wJ\ gOzc S (.)
`
1. a l R\R S`
M g^al S` (.)
12. n w{ lRM
2. [] R R\ LR S (.)
`
13. g}QfM vaR A\ jPqZ q\hawl S` (.P)
3. [] iRfzZl M R\ ^ S
`
14. R gwP `
\Q gwPd S
M S
4. R\ wd

hah[hm ` ` kR S`
5. R na\bR g

1. \Q jhQ hax\l S` 6. lRa\hbkR S`

` ha}\Q e\l S`
2. vll i

168
 Exercises

Exercise #8 |R\ ha^hp (first case) in ilfhj |ePL (active voice)

Parse each sentence in the list below following the steps explained below:

1) Mark each word of the sentence.

1/1
E.g., j\R Lhl III/1 S

2) Give details of each verb and noun in this format.

`
hlmc qbR (verb) Lhl
` go
[\l M (root) - LR to
hlm-` |e (verbal suffix) ` (present tense)/ilfhj-|ePL (Active voice)/III/1
M
noc `
qbR (noun) j\R
`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) - j\R (gi\j\c qh M , a-ending masculine)
`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) 1 (|R\ ha^hp , first case) /1 (viadQR, ` singular)
ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) ilfhj |R\ (1st case in the sense of il\f) to Lhl

3) Translate the sentence into English.

E.g., Rma goes.

M QRl S
1. qNk 9. bZabt ghl S 17. ^Zb gh S 25. d i\wlZ S

2. }Q\ } ahc S 10. bZz\ Qehc S 18. n S 26. bZa\ RPbcZ S

3. } a qehl S M hc S
11. bZa\ l_ 19. }Q\ nhc S M
27. qNk\ elcZ S

4. bZa Qel S 12. } a hl S 20. bZabt ijPhl S 28. Pi\ alfc Z S

M qhc S
5. q\ 13. d\e\f qhbwhc S 21. } a\ iMafhc S 29. hw_\ nZacZ S

6. qlhl S 14. hw_\ qshc S M

22. qNk }\Q\hl S 30. bZz\ }\ecZ S

7. as hll S M hhc S
15. q\ 23. }Q\ }\Qhc S 31. bZabt RlZ S

8. Pi\ ^ahc S 16. j ns}hl S 24. } a Phl S 32. ^PL\ haxcZ S

169
 Exercises

Exercise #9 |R\ ha^hp (first case) in iRfh |ePL (passive voice)

Parse each sentence in the list below following the steps explained below:

1) Mark each word of the sentence.

1/1
E.g., j\R elZ III/1 S

2) Give details of each verb and noun in this format.

`
hlmc qbR (verb) elZ
`
[\l M (root) - w (1P) to see
hlm-` |e (verbal suffix) ` (present tense)/iRfh-|ePL (Passive voice)/III/1
M
noc `
qbR (noun) j\R
`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) - j\R (gi\j\c qh M , a-ending masculine)
`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) 1 (|R\ ha^hp , first case) /1 (viadQR, ` singular)
ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) iRfh |R\ (1st case in the sense of iRf) to elZ

3) Translate the sentence into English.

E.g., Rma is seen.

M QZl Z S
1. qNk 9. } a R M lZ S 17. bZz OlZ S

2. aZb\ q cZS 10. as selZ S 18. ^Zb wSZl Z S

3. bZw\ is _cZ S 11. ^Zb \elZ S 19. bZa\ nZcZ S

M lZ S
4. n o 12. ^PL\ \ecZ S

M
5. bZz\ q_cZ S 13. bZz lZ S

M lZ Z S
6. z w_ 14. Pi\ |\ cZ S

7. \L _lZ S 15. lZ Z S

8. aZb\ qhbecZ S 16. ^Zb o\lZ S

170
 Exercises

Exercise #10 hl e\ ha^hp (second case)

j\R 1/1
` gQ M 0 y\RR ` 2/1 Lhl III/1 S
d\efR 2/1

`
hlmc qbR (verb) Lhl
`
[\l M (root) - LR (1P) to go
hlm-` |e (verbal suffix) ` (present tense)/ilfhj-|ePL (Active voice)/III/1

M
noc `
qbR (noun) j\R
`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) - j\R (gi\j\c qh M , a-ending masculine)
`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) 1 (|R\ ha^hp , first case) /1 (viadQR, ` singular)
ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) ilfhj |R\ (1st case in the sense of il\f) to Lhl

M
noc `
qbR (noun) y\RR `
`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) - y\R (gi\j\c qh M , a-ending masculine)
`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) 2 (hl e\ ha^hp , 2nd case) /1 (viadQR, ` singular)
ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) - iRfh hl e\ (2nd case in the sense of iRf) to Lhl

M
noc `
qbR (noun) gQ M (ge-qbR, ` indeclinable)
`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) gQ M

M
noc `
qbR (noun) d\efR `
`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) - d\ef (gi\j\c qh M , a-ending masculine)
`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) 2 (hl e\ ha^hp , 2nd case) /1 (viadQR, ` singular)
ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) Non-i\ji-ha^hp connected to gQM

Translation: Rma goes to the village following the teacher.

M d\e QRl S
1. qNk M
6. qNk y\R |hl Lhl S 11. q ` lZ S
M neRf Z

M aZb qhc S
2. q\ ` &Pi abhc S
7. hw_\ bZa\Q |hl `
12. } a\ bZz\Q ^cZ S

3. j\R y\R Lhl S 8. hw_\ d\efR gQ `

` M aZb\Q abhc S 13. hw_\ d\e nZacZ S

`
4. hw_\ &Pi\Q jhc S `
9. bZabt as |hl R ghl S ` M
14. d\ef qbZwR gQ

5. } a\ bZz\Q q` _hc
M S `
10. }Q\ |\R gcjZ
Q } ahc S `
^Zb\Q o\[lZ S

171
 Exercises

Exercise #11 lsl e\ ha^hp (third case)

j\R 1/1
zZQ 3/1 R ` 2/1 swhl III/1 S

hlmc qbR ` swhl

`
[\l M (root) sw (6P) to touch
hlm-` |e (verbal suffix)- ` (present tense)/ilfhj-|ePL (active voice)/III/1

M
noc `
qbR (noun) j\R
`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) - j\R (gi\j\c qh M , a-ending masculine)
`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) 1 (|R\ ha^hp , 1st case) /1 (viadQR, ` singular)
ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) ilfhj |R\ (1st case in the sense of il\f) to swhl

M
noc `
qbR (noun) R `
`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) - (gi\j\c qh M , a-ending masculine)
`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) 2 (hl e\ ha^hp , 2nd case) /1 (viadQR, ` singular)
ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) iRfh hl e\ (2nd case in the sense of iRf) to swhl

M
noc `
qbR (noun) zZQ
`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) - z (gi\j\c qh M , a-ending masculine)
`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) 3 (lsl e\ ha^hp , 3rd case) /1 (viadQR, ` singular)
ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) ijZ lsl e\ (3rd case in the sense of ij) to swhl

Translation: Rma touches the pot by the hand.

`
1. bZabt z\O\ R ghl S M
7. qNk M
q\O\ nz y\R Lhl S

` ^ahc
2. bZa\ bZz Pi\Q gQ M S M nz alfc Z S
8. bZz\ L

3. bZabt zZQ ns}hl S M ecZ S

9. Pi\ ^PL nz gQ^

4. bZabtZQ z\O\ glZ S

M ecZ S
5. Pi\ bZa bZz gQ^

6. bZabtZQ zZQ selZ S

172
 Exercises

Exercise #12 dlM ha^hp (fourth case)

bZabt 1/1
M 4/1 bZwR ` 2/1 bb\hl III/1 S
q\e

hlmc qbR ` bb\hl

[\l M b\ (3U) to give
hlm-` |e /ilfhj-|ePL /III/1

M
noc qbR ` bZabt
|\hlqhbiR -` bZabt (gi\j\c qh M )
`
nqM -|e 1 (|R\ ha^hp ) /1 (viadQR)`
ha^hp-g f ilfhj |R\ to bb\hl

M
noc qbR ` bZwR `
|\hlqhbiR ` bZw (gi\j\c qh M )
`
nqM -|e 2 (hl e\ ha^hp ) /1 (viadQR)`
ha^hp-g f iRfh hl e\ to bb\hl

M
noc qbR ` q\e
M

|\hlqhbiR ` qM (gi\j\c qh M )
`
nqM -|e M ha^hp , 4th case) /1 (viadQR)`
4 (dl
M (4th case in the sense of nb\Q) to bb\hl
ha^hp-g f nb\Q Z dl

Translation: Devadatta gives the land to son.

`
1. j\R hwa\e aZb\Q bb\hl S ` Phl S
6. } a ^PL\e bZzR

M
2. qNk bZa\O\ &Pi abhl S `
7. hw_ RP\e aZb\Q ql S

3. qM \Le F}hl S 8. dne\fO\ QR S

Z qijPhl S
4. bZabt }QO 9. d\eO QR S

5. is y\R\e j\RZ nz Lhl S Z h S

10. }QO

11. aN\e \z\ S

173
 Exercises

Exercise #13 qrR ha^hp (fifth case)

bZabt 1/1
` qlhl III/1 S
as\l 5/1

hlmc qbR ` qlhl

` fall
[\l M (1P) ql to
hlm-` |e /ilfhj-|ePL /III/1

M
noc qbR ` bZabt
|\hlqhbiR -` bZabt (gi\j\c qh M )
nqM -|e 1 (|R\ ha^hp ) /1 (viadQR)`
ha^hp-g f ilfhj |R\ to qlhl

M
noc qbR ` as\l `
|\hlqhbiR ` as (gi\j\c qh M )
nqM -|e 5 (qrR ha^hp , 5th case) /1 (viadQR)`
ha^hp-g f gq\b\Q Z qrR (5th case in the sense of gq\b\Q) to qlhl

Translation: Devadatta falls from the tree.

` cZ S
1. }Q\ d\l hQalf `
6. \L\l RP OlZ S

2. z\O\ qlhl S M hl S
7. ^PLZO bZa l_

3. }Q\ y\RZO Lhc S ` ` ^PL\ nhc S

8. \L\l |\i

4. } a bZz\l bZ` z |\ Phl S `

9. j\l g Q gh S

`
5. aZb\ d\e\fl hw_ \ecZ S `
10. ne\fl d h^- ^ahlS

M
11. qNk qM /qZ
M /q\l `
M haQ\ Lhl S

M
12. bZabt q/q M
\O\ qsi ` anhl S

13. |\\Q/|\ /|\ZO qsi ` qNk

M Q } ahlS

`
14. aZb\ d\e/d\e/d\e\fl haQ\ Q \ecZ S

174
 Exercises

Exercise #14 k ha^hp (sixth case)

bZabt 6/1 qM 1/1 ` jhl III/1 S

&Pi\Q 2/3

hlmc qbR ` jhl

[\l M s (1P) to remember
hlm-` |e - /ilfhj-|ePL /III/1

M
noc qbR ` qM
|\hlqhbiR -` qM (gi\j\c qh M )
nqM -|e 1 (|R\ ha^hp ) /1 (viadQR)`
ha^hp-g f - ilfhj |R\ to jhl

M
noc qbR ` bZabt
|\hlqhbiR ` bZabt (gi\j\c qh M )
nqM -|e 6 (k ha^hp , 6th case) /1 (viadQR)`
ha^hp-g f n-k to qM

M
noc qbR ` &Pi\Q `
|\hlqhbiR ` &Pi (gi\j\c qh M )
nqM -|e 2 (hl e\ ha^hp ) /3 (oadQR)`
ha^hp-g f iRfh hl e\ to jhl

Translation: The son of Devadatta remembers verses.

M w{ alfl Z S
1. i\w L M \ecZ S
Z bZa\Q\ L\
6. aZbO

2. } aZjeP ^Zb o\lZ S 7. }Q\Q\ bZw }Q j lZ S

3. zeP bZa ^ahl S 8. |\\Q\ n\l q` Nk

M } ahl S

`
4. bZa\Q\R w Z
bZaw lZ S `
9. \aj\Q\ hzR\e gzR gh S

5. bZabt q ` lZ S
M neRf Z 10. e\Q\ }qePh S

175
 Exercises

Exercise #15 nR ha^hp (seventh case)

1/1
j\R LszZ 7/1 hlhl III/1 S

hlmc qbR ` hlhl

[\l M \ (1P) to stand, to stay
hlm-` |e /ilfhj-|ePL /III/1

M
noc qbR ` j\R
|\hlqhbiR -` j\R (gi\j\c qh M )
`
nqM -|e 1 (|R\ ha^hp ) /1 (viadQR)`
ha^hp-g f ilfhj |R\ to hlhl

M
noc qbR ` LszZ
|\hlqhbiR ` Lsz (gi\j\c qh M )
`
nqM -|e 7 (nR ha^hp , 7th case) /1 (viadQR)`
ha^hp-g f gh[ijZ nR (7th case in the sense of gh[ij) to hlhl

Translation: Rma stays in the house.

1. ^Zb\ PiZ ecZ S 5. \LZ nhl RP haxlZ S

2. bZabt ^ZbeP w lZ S M
6. qeP M hl S
nlP bZabt l_
3. } a ^PLZk M jRlZ S 7. bZzZ qZM gz qM S bZzZ QZ gz Q S
M
4. bZabt q zeP qehl S 8. |\Zk M n M qNk
M } ahl S

Exercise #16 gi\j\c qh M * nafQ\R-w{ (a-ending masculine pronouns)

Complete the sentence by placing pronouns naf, vi, g, qj, and qa f in their declined forms.

E.g., na 1/3 aZb\ 1/3

haxcZ III/3 S
1/3 1/3 1/3 1/3
1. }Q\ abhc S 5. ^Zb\ o\cZ S
2. 5/1
` }Q\ Lhc S
y\R\l 5/1 6. 4/1
M
qNk\e 4/1
bb\hl S
7/1
3. hakeZ 7/1 n alfl Z S 7. 7/1
i\Z 7/1 qNk
M hlhl S
6/3
4. bZz\Q\ 6/3 L\
M nhcS

176
 Exercise

Exercise #17 Relative pronouns in masculine

1/1
e oP[hl III/1 n 1/1
abhl III/1 S

1/1
eb ` clause e oP[hl III/1
1/1
lb ` clause n abhl III/1

Of eb ` clause
hlmc qbR ` oP[hl
`
[\l M o[M (1P) to know
hlm-` |e /ilfhj-|ePL /III/1

M
noc qbR ` e
|\hlqhbiR -` eb `(bi\j\c qh M nafQ\R, d-ending masculine pronoun)
`
nqM -|e 1 (|R\ ha^hp ) /1 (viadQR)`
ha^hp-g f ilfhj |R\ to oP[hl

Of lb ` clause
hlmc qbR ` abhl
[\l M ab ` (1P) to speak
hlm-` |e /ilfhj-|ePL /III/1

M
noc qbR ` n
|\hlqhbiR -` lb `(bi\j\c qh M nafQ\R, d-ending masculine pronoun)
`
nqM -|e 1 (|R\ ha^hp ) /1 (viadQR)`
ha^hp-g f - ilfhj |R\ to abhl

Translation: One who knows, he speaks.

1. e l l Ll S ` }Q\ hQanhc n y\R ^ahl S

5. ehQ na
2. eZ QRhc lZ qhc S `
6. eZQ na hake\ qhbecZ lR d\e QR\hR S
3. e w lZ n |T qshl S `
7. e nafhQ |\ lZ l j\e QR gSM
4. eZ j nZacZ lZ ^p\ nhc S `
8. eZ }Q\ j ^}cZ lZk\ ePLR j azhl S

177
 Exercise

Exercise #18 qh M * nafQ\R-w{ (masculine pronouns) - lb, eb, vlb, hiR `

` declined forms.
Complete the sentence by placing pronouns lb, vlb, hiR in

1/1 1/1
E.g., n M
qNk RPblZ III/1 S

1/1 1/1 4/1

1. j lZ S 10. d\e\fe 4/1 QR S
1/2
2. \ 1/2 hQanl S 11. 4/2
bZa\O\ 4/2 QR S
1/3 1/3 4/3 4/3
3. }Q\ nZacZ S 12. Z
}QO h S
4. 2/1
M 2/1 qehl bZabt S
L 13. 5/1
` qlhl S
z\l 5/1
2/2
5. ^Zb 2/2 }\Q\hl S 14. 6/1
M
qNk 6/1
qM F}hl S
6. 2/3 ` }\Q\hl S
&Pi\Q 2/3 15. 6/2
} aeP 6/2
n oP[hl S
3/1
7. Z 3/1 gQ^ahl
bZzQ M S 16. 6/3
}Q\Q\ 6/3 y\RZ hlhl S
3/2
8. z\O\ 3/2 \bhl S 17. 7/1
bZw Z 7/1 hQanhl S
3/3 3/3 7/3
9. |\ } ahl S 18. i\Zk M 7/3 hlhl S

M ih (a-ending neuter)
Exercise #19 gi\j\c Qqn

1. hR \hQ \bhl S ` |hl Lhc S

5. hR\h QLj\l aQ
2. iRZ }Z |i\wZl Z S 6. w\\\ a\ZO \Q |\ lZ S
`
3. q\fhQ as\l qlhc S M i\e elZ S
7. i\j L
4. nR `
M he M elZ S
gQ^ M
8. g-Z nhl wj j q_lZ S

M ih nafQ\R-w{ (neuter pronouns)

Exercise #20 Qqn

` their declined forms.

Complete the sentence by placing naf, vi, g, qj, lb, vlb, and hiR in
E.g., na 1/1 } 1/1 Lhl III/1 S

1. 1/1
` gQ^
R 1/1 M elZ S 6. 1/3
hR\h 1/3 Lhc S
1/3
2. w\\h 1/3 gaLcZ S 7. 4/1
hR\e 4/1 a bb\hl S
3. 5/1
` wj j }\elZ S
g-\l 5/1 8. 5/1
` n R
i\j\l 5/1 M hlS

4. 6/3
`
i\e\f\ 6/3 i\jR ghS 9. 6/3
w\\\ 6/3 l }\Q\hl n S
7/1
5. gjeZ 7/1 \hQ alfc Z S 10. 7/1
|ijZ 7/1 vlb ` a\ elZ S

178
 Exercises

Exercise #21 Relative pronouns in neuter

1. eb ` gxlZ lb ` g-RS `
5. eZQ \hQ |\ cZ ll n\[QR S`
2. eb ` QZ \O\ elZ lb ` qR S` `
6. e\l i\j\l ` j }\elZ l l w\Z \elZ S
wj
3. e\hQ q\h qlhc l\hQ bz S M
7. e qNk `
olZ lZk\ \Q\R qwR _lZ S
M
4. qNk `
el i\e ` hl S
ijPhl lZQ jR gdf `
8. ehQ |ijZ `
Rz\a\\hQ nhc ll q\hR S

`
Exercise #22 geR (Indeclinables) derived from [\l M

M
1. } a\ L L\ RQ_Pi hQalfc Z S ` ^
7. } a\ LfR gQ M e RQ_Pi
M hawhc S
`
2. hw_ d\efR qL |T qshl S `
8. bZa | &Pi hh\ n aZb\Q qhl S
M
3. qNk ` Rf gaL
w\\\R g ` M hl jRlZ d S
l_ M
9. qNk aj\ e |\ gje Lhl S
4. j l \\ n Q w lZ S M
10. qNk \QQZ ^Zb o\h[\ l oP[hl S
5. hw_ d\ef qbZw ha\e qQM qshl S `
11. na\fQ &Pi\Q ` \ g\Q d
s ` na\fQ has
`
6. bZabt is \ [Q ^lZ S `
hw_ d\efR gh^Lhl S

`
Exercise #23 geR (Indeclinables) derived from nafQ\R

`
1. el aj\ eR gh ll n na }hl S 13. ihl ` R gQ
` ^ahl
M S
2. iMl w\\h qhn S 14. ihl Q` R gQ
` ^ahl
M S
3. el \QQZ RP ^ahl gl w\ q S `
15. g hl iZ hdl abhc S
4. j nafl ^ahl S ` Q l_
16. n iZ Qhdl UZ M hl S

5. e [R gh l ah gh S ` z hawhl S
17. ihdl Ls
`
6. l va nhl ll nR S` 18. ihhl bZ` w Z qNk
M hQanhl S
7. g a\Z qbZw gh S `
19. bZabt hihrl i\e ijPhl S
8. iM anhn S 20. hirQ a M gh S
9. vl\hQ a\\hQ iM ecZ S 21. n ihhl/iMhdl/Bhdl/ib\hdl Q` elZ S
M hl S
10. eb\ bZabt hR\h qehl lb\ n l_ `
22. iMlhl i\j\l `
qlhl S
11. e\ bZabt abhl l\ l qM abhl S `
23. vll ihrl Q` \elZ S
12. e\ z l\ gRM S

179
 Exercises

Exercise #24 i\j\c qh M * (i-ending masculine)

1. ah hLhj bzhlS 7. hkO QR S

2. y'e h^xcZ S 8. \[Z Qsqhl ghl Q Q` qehl S
3. q\ gh Q\ bZl Z S 9. QsqlZ ghn q\hO\ qlhl S
4. hkh^ ihah^ d hLhj elZ S 10. el Q\ hah[ gh S
5. Qsqhl n\jhh^ nz hLhj |hl Lhl S 11. hLj ah gh [R\l S`
6. iha hah[R gQ `
` M ghleZ R Q bb\hl S 12. lZk M hLhjk M iqe anhc S

Exercise #25 i\j\c qh M * (u-ending masculine)

1. o M o\O\ qw M azhl S 7. a\eP gh nahl S

2. n\[ M ljP RZ RRM
M hM ^ nz qhawhl S 8. hnP |\i ` qwa djhc S
3. RRM M iMZ hQanhc S
M a LjP M qsi ` n\[ M anhl S
9. oO
4. iZ Q zZlQM \ hww M jPhbhl S 10. nak\ h}\nQ\ n\[Q\ d LNM bh\Rhlf lZ S
`
5. e w\R qhbwhl M QR S
l LjaZ M nhl zZl M RRM
11. Lj M
M \ \elZ S

6. RsaZ \z\ S ` Z LQ
12. Rz\o\ lhQ Z ` Qd
M o ` lZ S

Exercise #26 i\j\c qh M * (6-ending masculine)

1. j ha il\f d [\l\ d ^ahl S f P QR S

6. nb\eilsO
2. gZl\j zPl\j QRhc S 7. il\f ^PpM g Q ^ahlS
`
3. +\ b\lQ qehl S 8. +M q +D\ elZ S
4. RV\ zP\ cZ S f \ hah[ gh S
9. il
5. b\Z QR S 10. ilfhj nhl ^Pp\ ghq haxlZ S

Exercise #27 i\j\c h (-ending feminine)

1. \Q Z hQ\ ^ahl S 5. bZabt ue\ e\ d bZal\e R\\ bb\hl S

2. RPZ RRM
M `
\R \ gh S `
6. L\e\ }R Qel MS
M ecZ S
3. hake\ hQ+e\ Q gQ^ M
7. nZQ\ Lz\e\ anhc S
4. j\R is qe\ nZa\ ijPhl S 8. h}\n\e\ n\ u\ _lZ S

180
 Exercises

Exercise #28 i\j\c h nafQ\Rw{ (-ending feminine pronouns)

` their declined forms.
Complete the sentence by placing na\f, vi\, g\, lb, vlb, and hiR in

E.g., na\f 1/1 hdc\ 1/1 Qehl III/1 S

1. 2/1
` abhl S
i\R 2/1 6. 5/1
hdc\e\ 5/1
wPdhl S
2/3 2/3 6/1 6/1
2. i\ abhl S 7. bZal\e\ n\ abhlS
3. 3/1
ne\ 3/1 \elZ S 8. 6/3
` n\ abhlS
bZal\Q\R 6/3
4. 4/1
bZal\e 4/1 QR S 9. 7/1
` hQ\ gh S
bw\e\R 7/1
5. 4/3
bZal\O 4/3
QR S 10.
7/3
`
ga\n M 7/3 \QR gh S

Exercise #29 h* nafQ\R-w{ (feminine pronouns) - lb, eb, vlb, hiR `

` their declined forms.
Complete the sentence by placing pronouns lb, vlb, hiR in

1/1
1. bZal\ 1/1 QlZ S 10. 4/1
bZal\e 4/1 QR S
2. 1/2
n Z 1/2 ^al S 11. 4/2
` QR S
bZal\O\R 4/2
1/3 1/3 4/3 4/3
3. ga\ ^ahc S 12. |}\O h S
4. 2/1
` QehlS
nZQ\R 2/1 13. 5/1
h}\e\ 5/1
w{ }\elZS
2/2
5. qRZ 2/2 hbwhl S 14. 6/1
h e\e\ 6/1
|eP}Q hiRS
2/3 2/3 6/2 6/2
6. hdc\ }hl S 15. nZQeP RZ hlhl S
7. 3/1
We\ 3/1 nZacZ S 16. 6/3
` +\ ghS
ga\Q\R 6/3
8. 3/2
` qhbelZS
qR\O\R 3/2 17. 7/1
M
Lz\e\R ` hQanhl S
7/1

3/3 3/3 7/3

9. n\h^ \elZ S 18. ga\n M 7/3 hlhl S

Exercise #30 i\j\c h (-ending feminine)

1. q\afl ha i ^ahl S 6. l\ QLe\f |\i ` a\q gh S

2. na\f }Q a\j\n: Lhc S 7. }QQ h.e\ g oP[hl S
3. qhl qX\ nz i\e\ anhl S M hl S
8. Le\ n\ hwa l_
4. L\e Le\f nz h.: qhl S 9. qsh\ QLef nhc S
5. bZa qX QR S 10. zZ bZha R\ jl M S

181
 Exercise

Exercise #31 i\j\c h (i-ending feminine)

1. g|\ |\h ePL lZ S 7. w\cZ |\eZ vl\ lM qhl S

2. na\f ` abhc S
lM e ll qb 8. ns Z |i\j hM lO gaLlZ S
` M qanhl S
3. eaM hl hlhR gQ 9. ^p\Q\ Ll ^ hl Q gh S
4. RhM p M \ d ouM |\ lZ S
M \ s\ e
M
10. w\c n\ ^ lZ gQqqht S
M eZ ^ahl S
5. ^hp Rp M Z d vl\ pZ
11. lM Z d sl Z d ep
6. ns Z |\i ` vll n
` `
l hl hM l z S qqhl hl hnuR S`

Exercise #32 Relative pronouns in feminine

1. e\ bZa ^lkZ M R\lsqZ hlhl l QR S 4. ee\ haQ\ \Q Q |\ lZ n\ ohM u S

2. e\ Qx ^\jlbZw Z nhc l\ na\f ^La S 5. e\h^ } a wPdhl l\n\ hdc\Q\ Q\w _lZ S
3. e\ QLj: Lhl l\ hQanhl S 6. e\ h}\e\ njl anhl le\ ab\hR S

`
Exercise #33 bR/gbn-w{ (pronoun idam and adas)
`
Complete the sentence by placing pronouns bR and ` their declined forms.
gbn in
1. 1/1
M
qNk 1/1
gh S 8. 1/1
` ^ahl S
wj jR 1/1
1/2
2. M 1/2 S
qNk 9. 1/2
QZ Z 1/2 YM jl S
1/3 1/3 1/3
3. M
qNk\ nhc S 10. ^l\hQ 1/3 }\ecZ S
4. 2/3 ` }hlS
Pi\Q 2/3 11. 3/1
\QQZ 3/1 a M \elZ S
5. 3/1
M 3/1 a M \elZ S
qNkZ 12. 2/1
` q^lZ n S
ZR 2/1
6. 6/1
M
qNk 6/1
`
\QR gh S 13. 1/1
\hei\ 1/1 ^ahl S
7/1
7. hakeZ 7/1 had\j ^ahl S 14. 1/3
bZal\ 1/3
^ahc S

182
 Exercises

Exercise #34 e M b/gb-w{ (pronoun yu:mad/asmad)

1. gz \ qe\hR S 9. vlb ` a\ Re\ pR S` 17. Q Rhl e M \h^ Q gOqM LlZ S

2. iM hQanhn S 10. RR u\ e\ elZ S 18. RP RZ ^e\l S`
3. a\ q\a S 11. gn g\h^ Q \elZ S 19. g\i LNM QR\R S
4. ae lZ ab\R S M QR S
12. lO 20. e M \i q Q qqxlZ S
`
5. eeR dj S 13. R bb\l M S 21. vk a R\Lf S
6. \ qs\hR S 14. Q h S 22. RZ[\ Rhe g M S
7. R\ ab S 15. ge RR qM S `
23. vll he Q qqxlZ S
8. n z Q gal M S 16. la hw_ h}\n M S `
24. l g RR h|e Q gh S

Exercise #35 i\j\c qh M * (=-ending masculine)

1. nL `
M Lhl S M [Q bb\hl S
5. bZabt nLZ
M
2. nL Lhc S M
6. nL qsi ` bZabt Lhl S
M qshl S
3. bZabt nL M
7. nL qM gh S
M
4. nL\ ge elZ S M
8. nLh nhl bZabt hlhl S

Exercise #36 l/bi\j\c qh M * / h (t/d-ending masculine/feminine)

` }\Q\hlS
1. nafhal na 6. Rsb }\elZ S
`
2. d\ef qhQkbR qhbwhl S M qi
7. nb M Qe\hR S
3. n^\_is l aZ S `
8. qhb j }Q\Q jhl S
M nz qhQkb qhl S
4. j\R nb\ 9. bZabt [M \ Q qhl S
5. nafhabZ QR S 10. n nhR[ q\ Qehl S

Exercise #37 d/}i\j\c qh M * / h (c/j-ending masculine/feminine)

1. a\i ` |e
M lZ S 5. h} h^k3 h^-\ nhc S
2. n a\d abhl S 6. d bZa a\e M S
M elZ S
3. d\ gQ^ 7. a\d hake ^\kR S`
4. bZabt h}Z [Q bb\hl S 8. a\hd g f ^ahl S

183
 Exercises

`
Exercise #38 Q-gc qh M * (in-ending masculine)

1. q zhQ qhj hlhl S 7. w\hf Z QR S

2. ePhLQ \hQQ nZacZ S `
8. gh[i\hj w\h aZb\Q qhc S
M
3. na |\hQ nhQ ^ac M S 9. \hRQ is qe\ h}\na \Q ^cZ S
4. l la ahj qe S 10. nn\hj |\hQ\ ahj Q }\Qhc S
5. \R ahjh^ haQ\ } ahl S `
11. ghQ zhhQ nhl qh jRcZ S
`
6. vll w\ nQ\hnQ\ q lZ S ` |\hQ\ \R S
12. zZ ePhLQ

`
Exercise #39 Rl/al-gc qh M * (mat/vat-ending masculine)

1. `
R\Q Q\j\e ohM uRl\ bZa S 6. qhQkb\ l\Eef ohM uRhZ gaLlZ S
M
2. [ Rc zQRc QRhc S 7. RlZ QR S
M
3. hax\ac zQRc QR\hR S 8. hax\al g\Q Q gh S
4. ^Lac qQM qQM QR\R S 9. ohM uRl\ Rl nwe Q gh S
`
5. ^Lal q ^Lal\ eR qhbelZ S `
10. ^Lahl gaLlZ nhl n ohM uR\Q ^ahl S

Exercise #40 wls- gc qh M * (at of present participle ending masculine)

` ePL ijPhl S
1. n ^p nQ iRf `
4. va qel\ ^Lal\ vlb ` a\R pR S`
2. lZ ^p\ nc iRfePL iMafhc S M
5. nl qNk\l iZ` w }\elZ S
3. bZabt qdc nPRbt qehl S `
6. hake\Q \el n q}\elZ S

`
Exercise #41 gQ-gc qh M * (an-ending masculine)

1. \ vi S `
8. Q \QR \QR ` M lZ S

2. \ bZa\Q\ |R nahl S M
9. j\ qNk M
j\}qNk S
3. j\}\ \ qehl S 10. vlZ a\f \ hl cZ S
4. w\f[\ q\5\Q zjhl S 11. gR\Q ghQ nhc S
`
5. Q\ \QR hQ qehl S 12. \ Z Rhzh hlhl S
6. n Q RhzR\Q }\Q\hl S 13. Rhz\ j\}\ ^R\Q ^lZ S
7. qjR\Q Z QR S 14. q\5\Q A\ n j\\ j\}\ ^ahl S

184
 Exercises

`
Exercise #42 gQ-gc M i (an-ending neuter)
Qqn

1. vi ^ahl S 9. Z QR S
2. n }\Q\hl S `
10. gl Q\h S
3. o?hQ iR\fh aZbQZ \ecZ S 11. hax\ hax\ hl lZ S
4. ePhLQ iRf iMafhc S 12. h hQ\ hQ\ hl lZ S
5. } a\ }7\hQ ^cZ S `
13. iRf\ hnhuR c bZal\ e}cZ S
6. Q iRf\ Q |}e\ Q [QQZ gRsl ^ahl S 14. iRfh l gh[i\j gh S
7. n bZabt hl Q\\ \elZ S ` ^ahc
15. } a\ }7hQ }7hQ R gQ M S
8. n hahb\ iRfh^ R M lZ S 16. iRfn M bZabt aj\ e }\elZ S

`
Exercise #43 gn-gc M i (as-ending neuter)
Qqn

`
1. ll RQ dhl S 7. RQn lZ} lqn\ OlZ S
2. l as q\fhQ \hn S 8. vlb ` \Q RQPh^ |\ lZ S
3. bZabt qhl S 9. RR LNM hwjn\ QR\hR S
4. he\h RQn\ nz alfc Z S 10. RQn bZal\ d S
`
5. vll Ph^ pR S` 11. bZal\ RQhn hlhl S
6. n\ ad\hn eZ nZ ^ahc S ` e ad hn haxlZ S
12. vll Lj

`
Exercise #44 k/k-gc M i (i:/u:-ending neuter)
Qqn

1. l dkM dne% S 8. l aqkZM g- bb\hl S

2. Pl:hk |i\wcZ S 9. e}kM hnhu OlZ S
3. nak\ dh k nebf aZ le\ qehc S 10. dkM d M S
`
4. ^La\Q ^p\e e M bb\hl S M \ qehl S
11. ghdfk Phl dO
` M ns}hl S
5. z\l [Q `
12. ll Phlk\ Phl S
6. Q Phlk\ |i\elZ S 13. ehM k nhl aq M dhl S
7. zhah^f e}lZ S `
14. Q Phlhk nafR qOlZ S

185
 Worksheets for photocopying

Worksheet for conjugation

[\l M (root) : ( )

i\j (tense/mood) :

|ePL (voice) :

`
gR (stem) :

[\l M (root) : ( )

i\j (tense/mood):

|ePL (voice):

`
gR (stem)

186
 Worksheets for photocopying

`
nqM -|es `
(nominal suffixes) without l (indicatory) letters

`
adQR (Number) viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `
(Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
ha^hp (Case)

|R\ (1st case) n` 1/1 1/2 gn ` 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) gR ` 2/1 2/2 gn ` 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) 3/1 O\R ` 3/2 h^n ` 3/3

dlM (4th case) v 4/1 O\R ` 4/2 On ` 4/3

qrR (5th case) gn ` 5/1 O\R ` 5/2 On ` 5/3
k (6th case) gn ` 6/1 n ` 6/2 R ` 6/3
nR (7th case) 7/1 n ` 7/2 n M 7/3

`
nqM -|es (nominal suffixes) modified for neuter

|R\ (1st case) - /gR *` 1/1 1/2 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) - /gR *` 2/1 2/2 2/3

* The |e gR` comes only after g-ending |\hlqhbiR. `

The |e in this section of the chart is termed nafQ\R\Q [sarvanmasthna].

The g in this section of the chart is termed ^ [bha].

The g in this section of the chart is termed qb [pada].

187
 Worksheets for photocopying

Worksheet for declension

|\hlqhbiR :` Ending letter: h ( )

`
adQR (Number) viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `
ha^hp (Case) (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
|R\ (1st case) j\R 1/1 j\R 1/2 j\R\ 1/3

hl e\ (2nd case) j\RR ` 2/1 j\R 2/2 j\R\Q ` 2/3

lsl e\ (3rd case) j\RZ 3/1 j\R\O\R ` 3/2 j\R 3/3

dlM (4th case) j\R\e 4/1 j\R\O\R ` 4/2 j\RZO 4/3

qrR (5th case) j\R\l ` 5/1 j\R\O\R ` 5/2 j\RZO 5/3

k (6th case) j\R 6/1 j\ReP 6/2 j\R\\R ` 6/3

nR (7th case) j\RZ 7/1 j\ReP 7/2 j\RZk M 7/3

`
nP[QR (Vocative) zZ j\R S/1 zZ j\R S/2 zZ j\R\ S/3

|\hlqhbiR :` Ending letter: h ( )

`
adQR (Number) viadQR ` hadQR ` oadQR `
ha^hp (Case) (Singular) (Dual) (Plural)
|R\ (1st case) j\R j\R j\R\
hl e\ (2nd case) j\RR ` j\R j\R\Q `
lsl e\ (3rd case) j\RZ j\R\O\R ` j\R
dlM (4th case) j\R\e j\R\O\R ` j\RZO
qrR (5th case) j\R\l ` j\R\O\R ` j\RZO
k (6th case) j\R j\ReP j\R\\R `
nR (7th case) j\RZ j\ReP j\RZk M
`
nP[QR (Vocative) zZ j\R zZ j\R zZ j\R\

188
 Worksheets for photocopying

Worksheet for parsing a sentence

1) Mark each word of the sentence.

2) Give details of each verb and noun in this format.

`
hlmc qbR (verb)

[\l M (root)

hlm-` |e (verbal suffix) ( )/ / /

M
noc `
qbR (noun)

`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) ( -i\j\c h , -ending )

`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) ( ha^hp , case) / ( -dQR, ` )

ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) ( case in the sense of ) to

M
noc `
qbR (noun)

`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) ( -i\j\c h , -ending )

`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) ( ha^hp , case) / ( -dQR, ` )

ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) ( case in the sense of ) to

M
noc `
qbR (noun)

`
|\hlqhbiR (nominal base) ( -i\j\c h , -ending )

`
nqM -|e (nominal suffix) ( ha^hp , case) / ( -dQR, ` )

ha^hp-g f (meaning of the case) ( case in the sense of ) to

3) Translate the sentence into English.

189
 Visit www.arshaavinash.in

Website for free E-books on Vedanta and Sanskrit

All the E-books available on the website can be downloaded FREE!

PUJYA SWAMI DAYANANDA SARASWATI- A BRIEF BIOGRAPHY BY N.

AVINASHILINGAM. It is available in English, Tamil, Hindi and Portuguese.

SWAMI PARAMARTHANANDAS TRANSCRIBED CLASS NOTES: Gita (3329

pages), Isavasya Upanisad, Kenopanisad, Mundaka Upanisad, Mandukya
Upanisad with karika, Aitareya Upanisad, Prasna Upanisad, Brihadarnyaka
Upanisad (1190 pages), Brahma Sutra (1486 pages), Tattva Bodha, Atma
Bodha, Vivekachudamani (2038 pages), Panchadasi, Jayanteya Gita,
Naishkarmya Siddhi, Dakshinamurthy Stotram, Gayatri Mantram, Jiva Yatra,
Manisha Panchakam, Upadesha Saara, Saddarsanam, Drg Drsya Viveka,
Dhanyastakam, etc.

BRNI MEDHA MICHIKAS BOOKS ON SANSKRIT GRAMMAR: Dhatukosah,

Astadhyayi, Enjoyable Sanskrit Grammar- Basic Structure of the language,
Phonetics & Sandhi, Derivatives (Pancavrattayah), Study Guide to Panini
Sutras, etc.

There are many more books and articles on Yoga, Upasana, Holy chants,
Indian culture and Spirituality.

Arsha Avinash Foundation

104 Third Street, Tatabad, Coimbatore 641012, India
Phone: +91 9487373635
E mail: arshaavinash@gmail.com
www.arshaavinash.in